ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

UNDERGRADUATE CURRICULUM (UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENTS)

Campus: CEG Campus, Anna University.

Department: Electronics and Communication Engineering

Programme: B.E. Electronics and Communication Engineering

Regulations:2023 (Revised 2024), with effect from the AY 2024 – 25 to all the students of UG
Programme.
OVERVIEW OF CREDITS

SEM PCC PEC ESC HSMC ETC OEC SDC UC SLC TOTAL

I - - 4 11 - - 7 1 - 23

II - - 12 11 - - - 1 - 24

III 14 - - 4 - - 2 2 - 22

IV 18 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 24

V 16 3 - - - - 1 3 - 23

VI 11 - - - 3 3 3 3 - 23

VII 4 9 - - 3 3 3 1 - 23

VIII - - - - - - 8 - - 8

Total 63 12 19 26 6 6 26 11 1 170
% of
Categ 37.05 7.05 11.17 15.29 3.52 3.52 15.29 6.47 0.58 100
ory
CATEGORY OF COURSES

PCC – Professional Core Course ESC – Engineering Science Course

PEC – Professional Elective Course HSMC – Humanities Science and Management
Course
ETC – Emerging Technology Course SDC – Skill Development Course
OEC – Open Elective Course UC – University Course
SLC – Self Learning Course

*For Honours & Minor Degree, please refer the Regulations 2023 (Revised 2024).

1
 SEMESTER– I
Course Course Periods / Week
S. No. Course Name Credits Category
Code Type# L-T-P TCP*

1. EN23C01 Foundation English LIT 2-0-2 4 3 HSMC

2. MA23C01 Matrices and Calculus T 3-1-0 4 4 HSMC
3. PH23C01 Engineering Physics LIT 3-0-2 5 4 HSMC

4. ME23C01 Engineering Drawing and 3D LIT 2-0-4 6 4 SDC

Modelling
5. CS23C04 Programming in C LIT 2-0-4 6 4 ESC
6. ME23C04 Maker space LIT 1-0-4 5 3 SDC
7. UC23H01 தமிழர்மரபு/HeritageofTamils T 1-0-0 1 1 UC
8. - NCC/NSS/NSO/YRC L 0-0-2 2 - UC
TOTAL CREDITS 23
*TCP – Total Contact Period(s)
#
TYPE OF COURSE
LIT –Laboratory Integrated Theory
T – Theory
L – Laboratory Course
IPW – Internship cum Project Work
PW – Project Work
CDP – Capstone Design Project

2
 SEMESTER– II
Course Periods / Week
S. No. Course Code Course Name Credits Category
Type# L-T-P TCP*

1. EN23C02 Professional Communication LIT 2-0-2 4 3 HSMC

MA23C02 Ordinary Differential Equations
2. T 3-1-0 4 4 HSMC
and Transform Techniques
3. EC23C03 Electronic Devices LIT 2-0-4 6 4 ESC
4. CY23C01 Engineering Chemistry LIT 3-0-2 5 4 HSMC
EC23C06 Data Structures and Programming
5. LIT 2-0-4 6 4 ESC
in C++
6. EC23C04 Circuit Analysis LIT 3-0-2 5 4 ESC
தமிழரும் ததொழில்
UC23H02
7. நுட்பமும் /Tamils and T 1-0-0 1 1 UC
Technology
8. - Audit Course–I** T - - - -
TOTAL CREDITS 24

SEMESTER– III

Course Periods / Week

S. No. Course Code Course Name Credits Category
Type# L-T-P TCP*

Linear Algebra and Numerical

1. MA23C03 T 3-1-0 4 4 HSMC
Methods

2. EC23301 Electromagnetic Fields T 3-0-0 3 3 PCC

EC23C13 Digital Electronics and System

3. LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC
Design

4. EC23302 Signals and Systems T 3-0-0 3 3 PCC

5. EC23C02 Analog Circuits Design LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC

6. - Skill Development Course – I LIT 1-0-2 3 2 SDC

7. UC23U01 Universal Human Values LIT 1-0-2 3 2 UC

TOTAL CREDITS 22

3
 SEMESTER– IV

Course Course Periods / Week

S. No. Course Name Credits Category
Code Type# L-T-P TCP*

1. EC23401 Digital Signal Processing LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC

2. EC23402 Transmission Lines T 3-0-0 3 3 PCC

Analog and Baseband LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC
3. EC23403
Communication
4. EC23C05 Analog Electronic System Design LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC

EC23C10 Computer Architecture and T 3-0-0 3 3 PCC

5.
Organization
6. EC23C11 Control Systems T 3-0-0 3 3 ESC

7. - Skill Development Course – II LIT 1-0-2 3 2 SDC

8. EC23L01 Self Learning Course T 1-0-0 1 1 SLC

9. - Audit Course – II** T - - - UC

10. - NCC/NSS/NSO/YRC level 2 L 0-0-2 2 - UC
TOTAL CREDITS 24

SEMESTER– V
Course Course Periods / Week
S. No. CourseName Credits Category
Code Type# L-T-P TCP*

1. EC23501 Antenna and Wave Propagation LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC

2. EC23502 Digital Communication LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC
EC23C21 Microprocessors and
3. LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC
Microcontrollers
4. EC23503 Communication Networks LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC
5. - Professional Elective – I T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

6. - Industry Oriented Course I/ Summer T /LIT 0-0-0 1 1 SDC

Internship- I#
Engineering Entrepreneurship
7. UC23E01 LIT 2-0-2 4 3 UC
Development
TOTAL CREDITS 23
Courses for Honours Degree

Course Course Periods / Week

S. No. CourseName Credits Category
Code Type# L-T-P TCP*

1. EC23D01 Capstone Ideation CDP 0-0-12 12 6 SDC

4
 SEMESTER– V
Course Course Periods / Week
S. No. CourseName Credits Category
Code Type# L-T-P TCP*

(OR)
1. - Honours Elective – I* 3
2. - Honours Elective – II* 3
Courses for Minor Degree

Course Course Periods / Week

S. No. CourseName Credits Category
Code Type# L-T-P TCP*

1. - Minor Elective – I 3
2. - Minor Elective – II 3

SEMESTER– VI
S. Course Course Periods / Week
Course Name Credits Category
No. Code Type# L-T-P TCP*

1. EC23C14 Digital VLSI Design LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC

2. EC23601 Wireless Communications LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC
3. EC23602 Machine Learning T 3-0-0 3 3 PCC
4. - Emerging Technology – I T / LIT - - 3 ETC
5. - Open Elective – I T 3-0-0 3 3 OE
6. - Skill Development Course – III LIT 1-0-2 3 2 SDC
7. - Industry Oriented Course II T / LIT 0-0-0 1 1 SDC
Perspectives of Sustainable
8. EC23U02 T 2-0-2 4 3 UC
Development
TOTAL CREDITS 23
Courses for Honours Degree
S. Course Course Periods / Week
Course Name Credits Category
No. Code Type# L-T-P TCP*
Capstone Project Phase I - (Proof
1 EC23D02 of Concept Implementation & CDP 0-0-12 12 6 SDC
Validation)
(OR)
1. - Honours Elective – III* 3
2. - Honours Elective – IV* 3
Courses for Minor Degree
1. - Minor Elective – III 3
2. - Minor Elective – IV 3

5
 SEMESTER– VII
S. Course Course Periods / Week
Course Name Credits Category
No. Code Type# L-T-P TCP*
Millimeter Wave and Optical
1. EC23701 LIT 3-0-2 5 4 PCC
Communication
2. - Professional Elective - II T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
3. - Professional Elective - III T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
4. - Professional Elective - IV T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
5. - Emerging Technology – II T / LIT - - 3 ETC
6. - Open Elective – II T 3-0-0 3 3 OE
7. EC23702 Mini Project L 0-0-4 4 2 SDC

8. EC23703 Industry Oriented Course III/ T / LIT 0-0-0 1 1 SDC

Summer Internship- II***

9. EC23U01 Standards – Electronics and T 1-0-0 1 1 UC

Communication Engineering
TotalCredits 23
Courses for Honours Degree

S. Course Course Periods / Week

CourseName Credits Category
No. Code Type# L-T-P TCP*
Capstone Project Phase II - (Product
1. EC23D03 Development – Publication / Patent CDP 0-0-12 12 6 SDC
Submission)
(OR)
1. - Honours Elective – V* 3
2. - Honours Elective – VI* 3
Courses for Minor Degree

S. Course Course Periods / Week

Course Name Credits Category
No. Code Type# L-T-P TCP*

1. - Minor Elective – V 3
2. - Minor Elective – VI 3

SEMESTER– VIII
S. Course Course Periods / Week
Course Name Credits Category
No. Code Type# L-T-P TCP*
Project Work /Internship cum Project
1. EC23801 L 0-0-16 16 8 SDC
Work
TOTAL CREDITS 8

6
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES: VERTICALS

Vertical I Vertical II Vertical III Vertical IV Vertical V Vertical VI Vertical VII Vertical VIII

Wireless RF
Signal and Semiconduc Computatio Biomedical
Communicatio Embedded SensorTechnologiesa
Image tor Chip Technologie nal
n Systems ndIoT Technologies
Processing Design s Intelligence
Technologies

Advanced CMOS Space Time PIC

Microwave Soft Introduction to MEMS
Digital Signal Analog IC Wireless Microcontroll Biomedical Instrumentation
Electronics Computing and NEMS
Processing Design Communication ers

Passive RF
VLSI Testing and Advanced
Digital Speech Cognitive Radio Bio-inspired Sensors Actuators and
and Design Microwave Microcontroll Biomedical Assist Devices
Processing Networks Computing Interface Electronics
for Testability Integrated ers
Circuits

DSPArchitecture Real Time

Data Satellite Electronic Operating Introduction to Nano
and Embedded Radiological Equipment
Converters Communication warfare Systems Electronics
Programming Systems

Optical
VLSI Signal VLSI Signal Wireless Advanced Operating Pattern Wireless Sensor Brain Computer
Processing Processing Communication Antennas Systems Recognition Network Design Interface and its Applications
s

RF Digital Radar Parallel and Digital

Digital Control Soft Computing and its
Microelectro Switching and Technologie Distributed Speech Fiber Optic Sensors
Engineering Applications
nics Networking s Processing Processing

Foundation
VLSI Adhoc and Skills In
Multimedia RF
Physical Wireless Integrated MeasurementsAndInstrume
Compression Microelectro Robotics Optoelectronics
Design Sensor Product ntation
and Networks nics
Automation Networks Developmen
t

7
 Satellite Electronic
Optoelectroni RadarTechnolo
Communicati System Bio-inspired Computing
cs gies
on prototyping

Measureme
nts And
Instrumentat
ion

Signal
Medical image analysis
Integrity

Introduction
to Nano Introduction to Biomimicry
Electronics

Introduction
to SoC
Design

*For Honours Degree students can select elective courses from any of the vertical listed in the above table.

8
 ELECTIVE LIST FOR MINOR DEGREE: MINORS IN ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS

S. Course Course Periods/Week

CourseName Credits Category
No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP
EC23C26 Introduction to Electronic Devices and T 3 3 PEC
1. 3-0-0
Circuits
EC23C27 Introduction to Digital Electronics
2. LIT 2-0-2 4 3 PEC
EC23C28 Fundamentals of Electromagnetics
3. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23C29 Introduction to Communication
4. Engineering T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

EC23C30 Wireless Communication

5. technologies T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

EC23C31 Introduction to Internet of Things and

6. Embedded systems T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23C32 Electronic System Development
7. LIT 2-0-2 4 3 PEC

SKILL DEVELOPMENT COURSE

Periods/Week
S. Course Course
CourseName Credits Category
No. Code Type L-T-P TCP
EC23S01 Numerical and Signal Processing
1. LIT 1-0-2 3 2 SDC
Practice through Python
EC23S02 PCB Design Using CAD Tools for
2. LIT 1-0-2 3 2 SDC
Electronic Systems
EC23S03 RTL Design and Synthesis
3. LIT 1-0-2 3 2 SDC

EMERGING TECHNOLOGY COURSES

S. Course CourseName Course Periods/Week Credits Category

No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP
EC23E01 Principles of Digital Image Processing
1. T 3-0-0 3 3 ETC
EC23E02 5G Wireless Communication
2. T 3-0-0 3 3 ETC
Networks
3. EC23E03 Spintronics And Quantum Computing T 3-0-0 3 3 ETC
EC23E04 Clock and Power Management
4. T 3-0-0 3 3 ETC
Circuits
5. EC23E05 Electro Magnetic Interference and T 3-0-0 3 3 ETC
9
 Compatibility in Electronic Systems
6. EC23E06 Cryptography and Network Security T 3-0-0 3 3 ETC
7. EC23E07 IoT Enabled Systems Design T 3-0-0 3 3 ETC
EC23E08 Industrial IoT and Industry 4.0
8. LIT 2-0-2 4 3 ETC

VERTICAL1:SIGNAL AND IMAGE PROCESSING

S. Course Course Periods/Week

CourseName Credits Category
No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP
EC23C23 Advanced Digital Signal Processing
1. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23C24 Digital Speech Processing
2. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23C15 DSPArchitectureand Programming
3. LIT 2-0-2 4 3 PEC
EC23001 VLSI Signal Processing
4. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23C19 Digital Control Engineering
5. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23C25 Multimedia Compression and
6. Networks T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

VERTICAL2:SEMICONDUCTOR CHIP DESIGN

S. Course Course Periods/Week

CourseName Credits Category
No. Code Type L-T-P TCP
1. EC23002 CMOS Analog IC Design T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
2. EC23003 VLSI Testing and Design for Testability T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
3. EC23C12 Data Converters T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
4. EC23001 VLSI Signal Processing T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
5. EC23004 RF Microelectronics T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
6. EC23005 VLSI Physical Design Automation T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
7. EC23006 Optoelectronics T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
8. EC23007 Signal Integrity LIT 2-0-2 4 3 PEC
9. EC23C17 Introduction to Nano Electronics T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
10. EC23008 Introduction to SoC Design T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

10
 VERTICAL3:WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES

S. Course Course Periods/Week

CourseName Credits Category
No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP

1. EC23009 Space Time Wireless Communication T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

2. EC23010 Cognitive Radio Networks T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

3. EC23011 Satellite Communication T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23012 Optical Wireless Communications
4. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
5. EC23013 Digital Switching and Networking T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
6. EC23014 Adhoc and Wireless Sensor Networks T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
7. EC23015 Radar Technologies T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

VERTICAL4:RF TECHNOLOGIES

S. Course Course Periods/Week

CourseName Credits Category
No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP
1. EC23016 Microwave Electronics T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23017 Passive RF and Microwave Integrated
2. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
Circuits
3. EC23018 Electronic warfare T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

4. EC23019 Advanced Antennas T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

5. EC23015 Radar Technologies T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

6. EC23004 RF Microelectronics T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
7. EC23011 Satellite Communication T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

VERTICAL5:EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

S. Course CourseName Course Periods/Week Credits Category

No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP
1. EC23020 PIC Microcontrollers T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
11
2. EC23021 Advanced Microcontrollers T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

3. EC23022 Real Time Embedded Systems T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

4. EC23023 Operating Systems T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

5. EC23024 Parallel and Distributed Processing T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

EC23C22 Foundation Skills In Integrated Product

6. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
Development

7. EC23025 Electronic System prototyping LIT 1-0-4 5 3 PEC

8. EC23026 MeasurementsAndInstrumentation T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

VERTICAL6:COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE

S. Course CourseName Course Periods/Week Credits Category

No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP

1. EC23027 Soft Computing T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

2. EC23C20 Bio-inspired Computing T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

EC23023 Operating Systems
3. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
4. EC23028 Pattern Recognition T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
5. EC23C24 Digital Speech Processing T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23C33 Robotics
6. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

12
 VERTICAL7:SENSORTECHNOLOGIESANDIOT

S. Course CourseName Course Periods/Week Credits Category

No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP
1. EC23C16 Introduction to MEMS and NEMS T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
2. EC23029 Sensors Actuators and Interface T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
Electronics
3. EC23C17 Introduction to Nano Electronics T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
4. EC23C01 WirelessSensor Network Design T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
5. EC23030 Fiber Optic Sensor T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
6. EC23006 Optoelectronics T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

VERTICAL 8:BIOMEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES

S. Course CourseName Course Periods/Week Credits Category

No. Code Type
L-T-P TCP
EC23C09 Biomedical Instrumentation T 3 3 PEC
1. 3-0-0
EC23C07 Biomedical Assist Devices
2. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
BM23C02 Radiological Equipment
3. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
Brain ComputerInterface and its
4. EC23C08 T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
Applications
EC23C18 Soft Computing and its Applications
5. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23026 Measurements And Instrumentation
6. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23C20 Bio-inspired Computing
7. T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23031 Medical image analysis
9 T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC
EC23032 Introduction to Biomimicry
10 T 3-0-0 3 3 PEC

13
 OPEN ELECTIVE COURSES

Periods /
S. Course
CourseCode CourseName Week Credits Category
No. Type#
L-T-P TCP*
1. EC23901 Automotive Electronics T 3-0-0 3 3 OEC
2. EC23902 Electronics Engineering T 3-0-0 3 3 OEC
3. EC23903 Wireless Technologies T 3-0-0 3 3 OEC
4. EC23904 Microcontroller Programming T 3-0-0 3 3 OEC
5. EC23905 Consumer Electronics T 3-0-0 3 3 OEC
Principles of Modern Communication
6. EC23906 T 3-0-0 3 3 OEC
System
7. Computer Vision and Machine
EC23907 T 3-0-0 3 3 OEC
Learning
8. EC23908 Robotics and its Applications T 3-0-0 3 3 OEC

14
EN23C01 FOUNDATION ENGLISH L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To develop students’ foundational skills in reading, writing, grammar and vocabulary to enable them
to understand and produce various forms of communication.
• To enhance students’ proficiency in reading comprehension, narrative and comparative writing.
• To comprehend and analyse descriptive texts and visual images
• To articulate similarities and differences in oral and written forms.
• To improve students’ proficiency in reading and writing formal letters and emails.

UNIT I BASICS OF COMMUNICATION 6

Reading - Telephone message, bio-note; Writing – Personal profile; Grammar – Simple present tense,
Present continuous tense, wh-questions, indirect questions; Vocabulary – Word formation (Prefix and Suffix).
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening – Telephone conversation; Speaking Self-introduction; Telephone conversation – Video
conferencing etiquette
UNIT II NARRATION 6
Reading – Comprehension strategies - Newspaper Report, An excerpt from an autobiography; Writing –
Narrative Paragraph writing (Event, personal experience etc.); Grammar – Subject-verb agreement, Simple
past, Past continuous Tenses; Vocabulary – One-word substitution
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening – Travel podcast; Speaking – Narrating and sharing personal experiences through a podcast
UNIT III DESCRIPTION 6
Reading – A tourist brochure, Travel blogs, descriptive article/excerpt from literature, visual images; Writing
–Descriptive Paragraph writing, Grammar – Future tense, Perfect tenses, Preposition; Vocabulary –
Descriptive vocabulary
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening – Railway / Airport Announcements, Travel Vlogs; Speaking – Describing a place or picture
description
UNIT IV COMPARE AND CONTRAST 6
Reading – Reading and comparing different product specifications - Writing – Compare and Contrast Essay,
Coherence and cohesion; Grammar – Degrees of Comparison; Vocabulary – Transition words (relevant to
compare and contrast)
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening – Product reviews, Speaking – Product comparison based on product reviews - similarities and
differences

15
UNIT V EXPRESSION OF VIEWS 6
Reading – Formal letters, Letters to Editor ; Writing – Letter writing/ Email writing (Enquiry / Permission,
Letter to Editor); Grammar – Compound nouns, Vocabulary – Synonyms, Antonyms
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening – Short speeches; Speaking – Making short presentations (JAM)

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEACHING METHODOLOGY
Interactive lectures, role plays, group discussions, listening and speaking labs, technology enabled language
teaching, flipped classroom.
EVALUATION PATTERN
Internal Assessment
Written assessments
Assignment
Lab assessment
Listening
Speaking
External Assessment
End Semester Examination

LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of the courses, students will be able to
• Use appropriate grammar and vocabulary to read different types of text and converse appropriately.
• Write coherent and engaging descriptive and comparative essay writing.
• Comprehend and interpret different kinds of texts and audio visual materials
• Critically evaluate reviews and articulate similarities and differences
• Write formal letters and emails using appropriate language structure and format

TEXT BOOKS:
1. “English for Engineers and Technologists” Volume I by Orient Blackswan, 2022
2. “English for Science & Technology - I” by Cambridge University Press, 2023

16
REFERENCES
1. “Interchange” by Jack [Link], Fifth Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2017.
2. “English for Academic Correspondence and Socializing” by Adrian Wallwork, Springer,
2011.
3. “The Study Skills Handbook” by Stella Cortrell, Red Globe Press, 2019
4. [Link]

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 √ √
CO2 √
CO3 √ √
CO4 √
CO5 √ √

17
MA23C01 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques in solving practical problems.
• To familiarize the student with functions of several variables.
• To solve integrals by using Beta and Gamma functions.
• To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals.
• To acquaint the students with the concepts of vector calculus which naturally arise in many
engineering problems.

UNIT I MATRICES 9+3

Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Properties of Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors-
Cayley-Hamilton theorem (excluding proof) – Diagonalization of matrices - Reduction of
Quadratic form to canonical form by using orthogonal transformation - Nature of a Quadratic
form.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3
Limit, continuity, partial derivatives – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem - Total
derivative – Differentiation of implicit functions – Jacobians -Taylor‘s formula for two variables
- Errors and approximations – Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s
method of undermined multipliers.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3
Improper integrals of the first and second kind and their convergence – Differentiation under
integrals - Evaluation of integrals involving a parameter by Leibnitz rule – Beta and Gamma
functions-Properties – Evaluation of single integrals by using Beta and Gamma functions..
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of Solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals-
Evaluation of double and triple integrals by using Beta and Gamma functions.
UNIT V VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3
Gradient of a scalar field, directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Solenoidal and
Irrotational vector fields - Line integrals over a plane curve - Surface integrals – Area of a curved
surface – Volume Integral - Green‘s theorem, Stoke’s and Gauss divergence theorems (without
proofs)– Verification and applications in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Laboratory based exercises / assignments / assessments will be given to students wherever applicable
from the content of the course.

18
General engineering applications / branch specific applications from the content of each units wherever
possible will be introduced to students.
Suggested Laboratory based exercises / assignments / assessments :
Matrices
1. Finding eigenvalues and eigenvectors
2. Verification of Cayley-Hamilton theorem
3. Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of similar matrices
4. Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a symmetric matrix
5. Finding the powers of a matrix
6. Quadratic forms

Functions of Several Variables

1. Plotting of curves and surfaces

2. Symbolic computation of partial and total derivatives of functions

Integral Calculus

1. Evaluation of beta and gamma functions

2. Computation of error function and its complement

Multiple Integrals

1. Plotting of 3D surfaces in Cartesian and Polar forms

Vector Calculus

1. Computation of Directional derivatives

2. Computation of normal and tangent to the given surface

OUTCOMES:
CO 1 :Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
CO 2 :Use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.
CO 3 :Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems by using Beta and
Gamma functions.
CO 4 :Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas and volumes problems.
CO 5 :Apply the concept of vectors in solving practical problems.

TEXT BOOKS:

19
1. Joel Hass, Christopher Heil, Maurice [Link] "‘Thomas‘ Calculus", Pearson Education.,
New Delhi, 2018.
2. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 45th Edition, New
Delhi, 2020.
3. James Stewart, Daniel K Clegg & Saleem Watson "Calculus with Early Transcendental
Functions", Cengage Learning, 6th Edition, New Delhi,2023.
REFERENCES:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2018.
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education2nd Edition,
5th Reprint, Delhi, 2009.
3. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”,Narosa Publications,
5th Edition, New Delhi, 2017.
4. Narayanan S. and Manicavachagom Pillai T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II, S.
Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.
5. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd,
7 th Edition, New Delhi , 2012.
6. Ramana B.V., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd., 11th Reprint,
New Delhi, 2010.

CO – PO Mapping:

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
Course
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 P11 P12

CO1 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3

20
PH23C01 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LT P C
(Common to all branches of B.E/[Link] Programmes) 3 0 2 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To familiarize with crystal structure, bonding and crystal growth.
• To impart knowledge on Mechanics of Materials.
• To impart knowledge of oscillations, sound and Thermal Physics
• To facilitate understanding of optics and its applications, different types of Lasers and fiber optics.
• To introduce the basics of Quantum Mechanics and its importance.

UNIT I CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9+6

Crystal Bonding – Ionic – covalent – metallic and van der Walls’s/ molecular bonding. Crystal systems -
unit cell, Bravais lattices, Miller indices - Crystal structures - atomic packing density of BCC, FCC and HCP
structures. NaCl, Diamond, Graphite, Graphene, Zincblende and Wurtzite structures - crystal imperfections-
point defects - edge and screw dislocations – grain boundaries. Crystal Growth – Czocharalski method –
vapor phase epitaxy – Molecular beam epitaxy- Introduction to X-Ray Diffractometer.
1. Determination of Lattice parameters for crystal systems.
2. Crystal Growth – Slow Evaporation method
3. Crystal Growth Sol – Gel Method
UNIT II MECHANICS OF MATERIALS 9+6
Rigid Body – Centre of mass – Rotational Energy - Moment of inertia (M.I)- Moment of Inertia for uniform
objects with various geometrical shapes. Elasticity –Hooke’s law - Poisson’s ratio - stress-strain diagram for
ductile and brittle materials – uses- Bending of beams – Cantilever - Simply supported beams - uniform and
non-uniform bending - Young’s modulus determination - I shaped girders –Twisting couple – Shafts.
Viscosity – Viscous drag – Surface Tension.
4. Non-uniform bending -Determination of Young’s modulus of the material of the beam.
5. Uniform bending -Determination of Young’s modulus of the material of the beam
6. Viscosity – Determination of Viscosity of liquids.

UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, SOUND AND THERMAL PHYSICS 9+6

Simple harmonic motion - Torsional pendulum –- Damped oscillations –Shock Absorber -Forced oscillations
and Resonance –Applications of resonance.- Waves and Energy Transport –Sound waves – Intensity level
– Standing Waves - Doppler effect and its applications - Speed of blood flow. Ultrasound – applications -
Echolocation and Medical Imaging. Thermal Expansion – Expansion joints – Bimetallic strip – Seebeck
effect – thermocouple -Heat Transfer Rate – Conduction – Convection and Radiation.
7. Torsional pendulum-Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of the disc
8. Melde’s string experiment - Standing waves.
9. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of sound velocity and liquids compressibility

UNIT IV OPTICS AND LASERS 9+6

21
Interference - Thin film interference - Air wedge- Applications -Interferometers–Michelson Interferometer -–
Diffraction - CD as diffraction grating – Diffraction by crystals -Polarization - polarizers -– Laser –
characteristics – Spontaneous and Stimulated emission- population – inversion - Metastable states - optical
feedback - Nd-YAG laser, CO2laser, Semiconductor laser - Industrial and medical applications -Optical
Fibers – Total internal reflection – Numerical aperture and acceptance angle – Fiber optic communication –
Fiber sensors – Fiber lasers.
10. Laser - Determination of the width of the groove of the compact disc using laser.
Laser Parameters
Determination of the wavelength of the laser using grating

11. Air wedge -Determination of the thickness of a thin sheet/wire

12. Optical fibre - Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
-Determination of bending loss of fibre.
13. Michelson Interferometer (Demonstration)

UNIT V QUANTUM MECHANICS 9+6

Black body radiation (Qualitative) – Planck’s hypothesis – Einstein’s theory of Radiation - Matter waves–de
Broglie hypothesis - Electron microscope – Uncertainty Principle – The Schrodinger Wave equation (time-
independent and time-dependent) – Meaning and Physical significance of wave function - Normalization -
Particle in an infinite potential well-particle in a three-dimensional box - Degenerate energy states - Barrier
penetration and quantum tunneling - Tunneling microscope.
14. Photoelectric effect – Determination of Planck’s constant.
15. Black Body Radiation (Demonstration)
16. Electron Microscope (Demonstration)

TOTAL: 75 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Understand the significance of crystal structure and bonding. Learn to grow crystals.
CO2: Obtain knowledge on important mechanical and thermal properties of materials and
determine them through experiments.
CO3: Conceptualize and visualize the oscillations and sound.
CO4: Grasp optical phenomenon and their applications in real life.
CO5: Appreciate and evaluate the quantum phenomenon.
CO6 Develop skill set to solve engineering problems and design experiments.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Raymond A. Serway, John W. Jewett, Physics for Scientists and Engineers, Thomson
Brooks/Cole, 2013.

22
 2. D. Halliday, R. Resnick and J. Walker, Principles of Physics. John Wiley &Sons, 10th
Edition, 2015.
3. N. Garcia, A. Damask and S. Schwarz, Physics for Computer Science Students, Springer-Verlag,
2012.
4. Alan Giambattista, Betty McCarthy Richardson and Robert C. Richardson, College Physics,
McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. R. Wolfson, Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson, 2016.
2. D. Kleppner and R. Kolenkow. An Introduction to Mechanics, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1
CO6 3 2 1 2

23
 ME23C01 ENGINEERING DRAWING AND 3D MODELLING L T P C
2 0 4 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES
After successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Understand and use the engineering curves in engineering applications and projection techniques to
construct conic curves, points and lines.
2. Develop skills in projecting surfaces and solids and create 2D models using CAD software.
3. Develop skills in 3D projection and 3D modeling of simple parts manually as well as using CAD software.
4. Understand and apply sectioning techniques to solids and assemble components.
5. Develop skills in lateral surface development and sheet metal design.

INTRODUCTION

Manual drawing tools (Mini Drafter, Set Squares, Protractor, Compass, and different grades of pencil).
‘BIS’ specifications and rules of Engineering Drawing – Arrows (2H thin line body, HB Filled head and
L:W = 3:1 ratio), lettering (Digital fonts, font sizes pertaining to usage and representation), types of
line and their syntax (Drawing based – Continuous thin & thick, dashed, dashed dotted and Application
based – extension, dimensioning, construction, projection, reference, axis, section, hatching, and
break lines), scaling (up, down and equal),and dimensioning. Placing and positioning the ‘A3’ size
drawing sheet over the drawing table. Principal planes and projection, Division of line and circle in to
equal parts, and construction of polygons

UNIT I ENGINEERING CURVES, PROJECTION OF POINTS AND LINES

Construction of conic curves with their tangent and normal – ellipse, parabola, and hyperbola by
eccentricity method

Construction of special curves with their tangent and normal – cycloid, epicycloid, and involute

Projection of points and I angle projection of lines inclined to both principal planes by rotating line
method and trapezoidal rule – marking their traces.

Lab exercises: Study exercise –Introduction toSketching (or) Drawing, and modification tools in CAD
software (AutoCAD, CREO, CATIA, Solid Works, Inventor, Fusion 360)

(6+12 = 18 Hours)

Activities based learning: Identification of the curves used in the application given in the flash card,
demonstration of the instantaneous centre of rotation of governors with respect to angle of inclination
of the arms of the governors
24
UNIT II PROJECTION OF SURFACES & SOLIDS, AND 2D MODELING

Projection of surfaces inclined to both the principal planes – polygonal, trapezoidal, rhomboidal and
circular

Projection of solids – prisms, pyramids, and axisymmetric solids when the axis inclined to both the
principal planes – freely hanging – contour resting condition on either of the planes by rotating object
method

Lab exercises: Construction of basic sketches – lines, circle, polygon, spline curves, coils, along with
dimensioning. Familiarizing with geometric constraints and their types

(6+12 = 18 Hours)

Activities based learning: Making the solids using cardboards, shadow mapping and contour drawing
at different orientation of the solids using torches

UNIT III 3D PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND 3D MODELING OF SIMPLE PARTS

Free hand sketching – I & III angle projections of engineering parts and components

Isometric projection of combination of solids – prisms, pyramids, axisymmetric solids, frustum

Perspective projection of prisms, pyramids and axisymmetric solids by visual ray method

Lab exercises: 3DModeling and 2D drafting ofmachine parts

(6+12 = 18 Hours)

Activities based learning: Flipped classroom for Free hand sketching, Jig saw activity for Isometric
projection, arts and crafts for perspective view

UNIT IV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND SECTIONED DRAFTING OF ASSEMBLED

COMPONENTS

Section of simple and hollow solids – prisms, pyramids and axisymmetric solids, solids with holes/
slots when the section plane perpendicular to one principal plane and inclined to other principal plane
(‘On the axis’ and ‘from the axis’ conditions)

Application based – section of beams (I, T, L, and C), section of pipe bracket, wood joints, composite
walls, shells, flange of a coupling and other similar applications

Lab exercises: Assembly ofparts with respect to engineering constraints, and sectioned drafting of
assembled components

25
 (6+12 = 18 Hours)

Activities based learning: Making of mitered joint in wood, sectioning the beams in different angles
of orientation and identifying the true shape

UNIT V LATERAL SURFACE DEVELOPMENT AND SHEET METAL DESIGN

Lateral surface development of sectioned solids when the section plane perpendicular to VP and
inclined to HP.

Application based – construction of funnel, chimney, dish antenna, door latch, trays, AC vents, lamp
shade, commercial packaging boxes with respect to sectioning conditions and other similar
applications

Lab exercises: Sheet metal design and drafting, drafting of coils, springs and screw threads

(6+12 = 18 Hours)

Activities based learning: Fabrication of funnels, chimney, lamp shade, boxes using card boards, ply
woods, acrylics

Total: 90 Hours

Note: Activities based learning should not be covered in the regular class hours. It should be given as
assignments to the group of maximum 3 members

COURSE OUTCOMES
After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Construct and identify different types of conic curves and special curves, and project the
points and lines pertaining to engineering applications
CO2: Project and visualize surfaces and solids in different orientations and utilize the CAD tools
for designing.
CO3: Create and draft accurate 3D models and 2D drawings of machine parts manually as well
as using CAD software
CO4: Determine the true shape of a sectioned solid and draft the assembled parts accordingly
CO5: Develop lateral surfaces of sectioned solids and design sheet metal components

TEXT BOOKS:
1. “Engineering Drawing” by N S Parthasarathy and Vela Murali, Oxford University Press; UK ed. Edition,
2015.
2. “Engineering Drawing + Auto CAD” by Venugopal K, V. Prabhu Raja, New Age International Publishers,
Sixth edition (1 January 2022).
26
REFERENCES:
1. "Basic Engineering Drawing: Mechanical Semester Pattern" by Mehta and Gupta, Charotar Publishing
House, 2nd edition, 2018.
2. "Engineering Drawing" by Basant Agrawal and C M Agrawal, Vikas Publishing House, 3rd edition, 2020.
3. "Engineering Drawing With Auto CAD" by B V R Gupta, McGraw Hill Education, 4th edition, 2019.
4. "Engineering Drawing" by P S Gill, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 5th edition, 2018.
5. "Engineering Drawing with an Introduction to AutoCAD" by Dhananjay Jolhe, Cengage Learning, 2nd
edition, 2020.
6. "Engineering Drawing" by M B Shah, Charotar Publishing House, 3rd edition, 2019
7. "Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing" by Imtiaz Hashmi, Pearson Education, 2nd edition, 2018.
8. "Computer Aided Engineering Drawing" by S Trymbaka Murthy, Scitech Publications, 3rd edition, 2020.
9. "CAED: Computer Aided Engineering Drawing for I/II Semester BE/Btech Courses" by Reddy K B, CBS
Publishers & Distributors, 2nd, 2019.
10. "Computer-Aided Engineering Drawing" by Subrata Pal, Oxford University Press, 2nd, 2020.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 3 3 2
2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 2
4 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

27
CS23C04 PROGRAMMING IN C L T PC
2 0 4 4

UNIT I BASICS OF C PROGRAMMING 6+12

Introduction to programming paradigms –- Structure of C program - C programming: Data Types - Constants
- Keywords - Operators: Precedence and Associativity - Expressions - Input/Output statements, Assignment
statements - Decision making statements - Switch statement.
PRACTICALS
1. Designing programs with algorithms/flowchart
2. Programs for i/o operations with different data types

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:
• EL - Programs using integer type, arithmetic operators and basic input/output.
• EL - Programs using other data types and operators.
• EL: Programs using else-if, switch

UNIT II LOOP CONTROL STATEMENTS AND ARRAYS 6+12

Iteration statements: For, while, Do-while statements, nested loops, break & continue statements -
Introduction to Arrays: Declaration, Initialization - One dimensional array -Two dimensional arrays –
Searching and sorting in Arrays – Strings – string handling functions - array of strings
PRACTICALS
1. Programs using various operators
2. Programs using decision making and branching statements
3. Programs using for, while, do-while loops and nested loops.
4. Programs using arrays and operations on arrays.
5. Programs implementing searching and sorting using arrays
6. Programs implementing string operations on arrays

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:

• EL: Programs using while, for,do-while, break, continue, enum.

• EL - Programs using arrays and operations on arrays.
• EL - Programs implementing string operations on arrays.
• EL - Programs using functions.

UNIT Ill FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 6+12

Modular programming - Function prototype, function definition, function call, Built-in functions – Recursion –
Recursive functions - Pointers - Pointer increment, Pointer arithmetic - Parameter passing: Pass by value,
Pass by reference, pointer and arrays, dynamic memory allocation

28
PRACTICALS
1. Programs using functions
2. Programs using recursion
3. Programs using pointers & strings with pointers
4. Programs using Dynamic Memory Allocation

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:

• EL - Programs using recursion.

• EL - Programs using pointers and arrays, address arithmetic.
• EL - Programs using Dynamic Memory Allocation, two dimensional arrays and pointers.
• EL - Programs using Pointers and strings.

UNIT IV STRUCTURES AND UNION 6+12

Storage classes, Structure and union, Features of structures, Declaration and initialization of structures,
array of structures, Pointer to structure, structure and functions, typedef , bit fields , enumerated data types,
Union.
PRACTICALS
1. Programs using Structures
2. Programs using Unions
3. Programs using pointers to structures and self-referential structures.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:

• EL - Programs using structures and arrays.

• EL - Programs using Pointers to structures, Self-referential structures.

UNIT V MACROS AND FILE PROCESSING 6 +12

Preprocessor directives – Simple and Conditional macros with and without parameters - Files - Types of file
processing: Sequential and Random access – File operations – read, write & seek.

PRACTICALS
1. Programs using pre-processor directives & macros
2. Programs to handle file operations
3. Programs to handle file with structure

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:

• EL - Programs using file operations in real-world applications

TOTAL: 90 (30+60) PERIODS

29
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie,D.M, "The C Programming language", Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2015.
2. Yashwant Kanetkar, Let us C, 17th Edition, BPB Publications, 2020.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, "Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C", Second Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2013.
2. Ashok N Kamthane, Programming in C, Pearson, Third Edition, 2020
3. Reema Thareja, "Programming in C", Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2016.
4. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, "C How to Program with an Introduction to C++", Eighth edition, Pearson
Education, 2018.
5. Byron S. Gottfried, "Schaum's Outline of Theory and Problems of Programming with C"' McGraw-Hill
Education, 1996.
6. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, "Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C", 1st Edition, Pearson
Education, 2013.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Write simple C programs using basic constructs.
CO2: Design searching and sorting algorithms using arrays and strings.
CO3: Implement modular applications using Functions and pointers.
CO4: Develop and execute applications using structures and Unions.
CO5: Illustrate algorithmic solutions in C programming language using files.

Total Hours: 90 (30+60)

CO-PO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO9
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 3 2 1 - - - 2 - 3 1 2 2
2 2 1 1 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 1 2 2
3 2 2 1 3 2 1 - - 3 - 3 3 1 2 2
4 2 1 1 3 2 1 - - 3 - 3 3 1 2 2
5 2 3 1 3 2 1 - - - 2 3 3 1 2 2
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 – high

30
ME23C04 MAKERSPACE L T P C
1 0 4 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

1. To practice the usage of various tools towards assembly and dis-assembly of different
items / equipment.

2. To make simple part / component using welding processes.

3. To train on the basic wiring practices of boards, machines, etc.

4. To provide a hands-on experience on the use of electronic components, equipment,

sensors and actuators.

5. To expose to modern computer tools and advanced manufacturing / fabrication processes.

LIST OF ACTIVITIES 1L,4P

(A). Dis-assembly & Assembly Practices
i. Tools and its handling techniques.
ii. Dis-assembly and assembly of home appliances – Grinder Mixer Grinder,
Ceiling Fan, Table Fan & Washing Machine.
iii. Dis-assembly and assembly of Air-Conditioners & Refrigerators.
iv. Dis-assembly and assembly of a Bicycle.
(B). Welding Practices
i. Welding Procedure, Selection & Safety Measures.
ii. Power source of Arc Welding – Gas Metal Arc Welding & Gas Tungsten Arc
Welding processes.
iii. Hands-on session of preparing base material & Joint groove for welding.
iv. Hands-on session of MAW, GMAW, GTAW, on Carbon Steel & Stainless Stell
plates / pipes, for fabrication of a simple part.
(C). Electrical Wiring Practices
i. Electrical Installation tools, equipment & safety measures.

ii. Hands-on session of basic electrical connections for Fuses, Miniature Circuit
Breakers and Distribution Box,
iii. Hands-on session of electrical connections for Lightings, Fans, Calling Bells.

31
 iv. Hands-on session of electrical connections for Motors & Uninterruptible Power
Supply.
(D). Electronics Components / Equipment Practices
i. Electronic components, equipment & safety measures.
ii. Dis-assembly and assembly of Computers.
iii. Hands-on session of Soldering Practices in a Printed Circuit Breaker.
iv. Hands-on session of Bridge Rectifier, Op-Amp and Transimpedance amplifier.
v. Hands-on session of integration of sensors and actuators with a Microcontroller.
vi. Demonstration of Programmable Logic Control Circuit.
(E).Contemporary Systems
i. Demonstration of Solid Modelling of components.
ii. Demonstration of Assembly Modelling of components.
iii. Fabrication of simple components / parts using 3D Printers.
iv. Demonstration of cutting of wood / metal in different complex shapes using
Laser Cutting Machine.

TOTAL: 75 Periods (15 Lecture + 60 Practical)

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Assemble and dis-assemble various items / equipment.
CO2: Make simple parts using suitable welding processes.
CO3: Setup wiring of distribution boards, machines, etc.
CO4: Utilise the electronic components to fabricate a simple equipment, aided with sensors and
actuators.
CO5: Take advantage of modern manufacturing practices.

REFERENCES:

1. Stephen Christena, Learn to Weld: Beginning MIG Welding and Metal Fabrication Basics,
Crestline Books, 2014.
2. H. Lipson, Fabricated - The New World of 3D Printing, Wiley, 1st edition, 2013.
3. Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring Installations (IS 732:2019)
4. A.S. Sedra and K.C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, Oxford University Press, 7th ed. (Indian
edition), 2017.

32
5. Mazidi, Naimi, Naimi, AVR Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C,
Pearson India, 1st edition 2013.
6. Visualization, Modeling, and Graphics for Engineering Design, D.K. Lieu, S.A. Sorby,
Cengage Learning; 2nd edition.

33
UC23H01 தமிழர் மரபு L T P C
1 0 0 1

அலகு I மமொழி மற் றும் இலக்கியம் : 3

இந்திய தமொழிக் குடும் பங் கள் – திரொவிட தமொழிகள் – தமிழ் ஒரு தெம் தமொழி – தமிழ்
தெவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தின் ெமயெ் ெொர்பற் ற தன் மம – ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல் அறம் – திருக்குறளில் மமலொண்மமக் கருத்துக்கள் – தமிழ் க்
கொப் பியங் கள் , தமிழகத்தில் ெமண தபௌத்த ெமயங் களின் தொக்கம் - பக்தி இலக்கியம் ,
ஆழ் வொர்கள் மற் றும் நொயன்மொர்கள் – சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் – தமிழில் நவீன இலக்கியத்தின்
வளர்ெ்சி – தமிழ் இலக்கிய வளர்ெ்சியில் பொரதியொர் மற் றும் பொரதிதொென் ஆகிமயொரின்
பங் களிப் பு.

அலகு II மரபு – பொறற ஓவியங் கள் முதல் நவீன ஓவியங் கள் வறர – சிற் பக்
கறல: 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வமர – ஐம் தபொன் சிமலகள் – பழங் குடியினர் மற் றும்
அவர்கள் தயொரிக்கும் மகவிமனப் தபொருட்கள் , தபொம் மமகள் – மதர் தெய் யும் கமல –
சுடுமண் சிற் பங் கள் – நொட்டுப் புறத் ததய் வங் கள் – குமரிமுமனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிமல
– இமெக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங் கம் , பமற, வீமண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வரம் – தமிழர்களின் ெமூக
தபொருளொதொர வொழ் வில் மகொவில் களின் பங் கு.

அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

ததருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம் , வில் லுப் பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம் , மதொல் பொமவக்
கூத்து, சிலம் பொட்டம் , வளரி, புலியொட்டம் , தமிழர்களின் விமளயொட்டுகள் .

அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களும் , விலங் குகளும் – ததொல் கொப் பியம் மற் றும் ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற் றும் புறக் மகொட்பொடுகள் – தமிழர்கள் மபொற் றிய அறக்மகொட்பொடு
– ெங் ககொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும் , கல் வியும் – ெங் ககொல நகரங் களும் துமற
முகங் களும் – ெங் ககொலத்தில் ஏற் றுமதி மற் றும் இறக்குமதி – கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில்
மெொழர்களின் தவற் றி.

அலகு V இந் திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற் றும் இந் திய பை்பொட்டிற் குத் தமிழர்களின்
பங் களிப் பு: 3
இந்திய விடுதமலப்மபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு – இந்தியொவின் பிறப் பகுதிகளில் தமிழ் ப்
பண்பொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுயமரியொமத இயக்கம் – இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் , சித்த
மருத்துவத்தின் பங் கு – கல் தவட்டுகள் , மகதயழுத்துப் படிகள் - தமிழ் ப் புத்தகங் களின்
அெ்சு வரலொறு.

TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு: தமிழ் நொடு
பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
34
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by: Department
of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link]) (Published by:
The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and
Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference Book.

35
UC23H01 HERITAGE OF TAMILS L T P C
1 0 0 1

UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3

Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical Literature
in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam Literature - Management
Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism in Tamil Land - Bakthi Literature
Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry - Development of Modern literature in Tamil - Contribution
of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.

UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car making - -
Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari, Making of musical
instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of Temples in Social and
Economic Life of Tamils.

UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3

Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam, Valari,
Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.

UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3

Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam Literature - Aram
Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities and Ports of Sangam Age
- Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest of Cholas.

UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND INDIAN

CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the other parts of
India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems of Medicine – Inscriptions
& Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.

TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு: தமிழ் நொடு
பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by: International
Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by: Department
of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)

36
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link]) (Published by:
The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and
Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference Book.

37
 NCC Credit Course Level 1*
UC23P01 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C
2 0 0 2

NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
L 1Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour ‘Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1

38
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 1*

UC23P02 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level – I L T P C
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem Solving
2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
L 1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

39
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 1*

UC23P03 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level – I L T P C
2 0 0 2

NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2

NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4

NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem Solving
2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3

40
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2

LEADERSHIP 5
L 1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2

SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8

SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

41
EN23C02 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LT P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

• To read and comprehend different forms of official texts.

• To develop students’ writing skills in professional context.
• To actively listen, read and understand written and oral communication in a professional context.
• To comprehend and analyse the visual content in authentic context.
• To write professional documents with clarity and precision

UNIT I CAUSE AND EFFECT 6

Reading – Newspaper articles on Social and Environmental issues; Writing – Instructions, Cause and effect
essay; Grammar - Modal verbs; Vocabulary – Cause and effect, Idioms
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening and Speaking – Listen to news reports and summarise in oral form.
UNIT II CLASSIFICATION 6
Reading – An article, social media posts and classifying based on the content; Writing – Definition, Note
making, Note taking (Cornell notes etc.) and Summarising; Grammar – Connectives; Vocabulary – Phrasal
verbs
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening and speaking: Social interaction (Conversation including small talk)
UNIT III PROBLEM AND SOLUTION 6
Reading – Visual content (Tables/charts/graphs) for comprehension; Writing - Problem and Solution Essay;
Grammar – If conditionals; Vocabulary – Sequential words.
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening – Group discussion; Speaking – Participating in a group discussion
UNIT IV REPORT 6
Reading – Formal report on accidents (industrial/engineering); Writing – Industrial Accident report; Grammar
– Active and passive voice, Direct and Indirect speech; Vocabulary – Numerical adjectives.
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening / watching – Television documentary and discussing its content, purpose etc.
UNIT V JOB APPLICATION AND INTERVIEW 6
Reading - Job advertisement and company profile; Writing – Job application (cover letter and CV) Grammar
– Mixed Tenses; Vocabulary – Collocations related to work environment

42
LAB ACTIVITY: 6
Listening – Job interview; Speaking – Mock interviews
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEACHING METHODOLOGY
Interactive lectures, role plays, group discussions, listening and speaking labs, technology enabled language
teaching, flipped classroom.

EVALUATION PATTERN
Internal Assessment

Written assessments

Assignment

Lab Assessment

Group discussion (Peer assessment)

Listening

External Assessment

End Semester Examination

LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of the courses, students will be able to

• To apply appropriate language structure and vocabulary to enhance both spoken and written
communication in formal contexts.
• Comprehend different forms of official documents
• Write professional documents coherently and cohesively.
• Interpret verbal and graphic content in authentic context
• Analyse and evaluate verbal and audio visual materials.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. “English for Engineers and Technologists” Volume 2 by Orient Blackswan, 2022

43
2. “English for Science & Technology - II” by Cambridge University Press, 2023.

REFERENCES:
1. “Communicative English for Engineers and Professionals” by Bhatnagar Nitin, Pearson
India, 2010.
2. ”Take Off – Technical English for Engineering” by David Morgan, Garnet Education, 2008.

3. “Advanced Communication Skills” by Mathew Richardson, Charlie Creative Lab, 2020.

4. [Link]

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 √ √
CO2 √ √
CO3 √ √
CO4 √ √
CO5 √ √

44
MA23C02 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORM L T P C
TECHNIQUES 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To acquaint the students with Differential Equations which are significantly used in
engineering problems.
• To make the students to understand the Laplace transforms techniques.
• To develop the analytic solutions for partial differential equations used in engineering by
Fourier series.
• To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations
in which the functions used are not periodic.
• To develop Z- transform techniques in solving difference equations.
UNIT I ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3
Homogeneous linear ordinary differential equations of second order -superposition principle -
general solution- Particular integral - Operator method - Solution by variation of parameters -
Method of undetermined coefficients - Homogeneous equations of Euler–Cauchy and
Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous linear differential equations with constant
coefficients.
UNIT II LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 9+3
Existence theorem - Transform of standard functions – Transform of Unit step function and
Dirac delta function – Basic properties - Shifting theorems - Transforms of derivatives and
integrals – Transform of periodic functions - Initial and Final value theorem - Inverse Laplace
transforms- Convolution theorem (without proof) – Solving Initial value problems by using
Laplace Transform techniques.
UNIT III FOURIER SERIES 9+3
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half-range Sine and
Cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identity – Computation of
harmonics.
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9+3
Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair - Fourier sine and cosine transforms –
Properties – Transform of elementary functions – Inverse Fourier Transforms - Convolution
theorem (without proof) – Parsevals’s identity.
UNIT V Z – TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9+3
Z-transform – Properties of Z-transform – Inverse Z-transform – Convolution theorem –
Evaluation of Inverse Z transform using partial fraction method and convolution theorem - Initial
and final value theorems – Formation of difference equations – Solution of difference equations
using Z - transform.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

45
Laboratory based exercises / assignments / assessments will be given to students from the content of the
course wherever applicable.
Branch specific / General Engineering applications based on the content of each units will be introduced
to students wherever possible.

OUTCOMES:
CO1 :Solve higher order ordinary differential equations which arise in engineering applications.
CO2 :Apply Laplace transform techniques in solving linear differential equations.
CO3 :Apply Fourier series techniques in engineering applications.
CO4 :Understand the Fourier transforms techniques in solving engineering problems.
CO5 :Understand the Z-transforms techniques in solving difference equations.
Suggested Laboratory based exercises / assignments / assessments :
Ordinary differential equations
1. Symbolic computation of linear ordinary differential equations
2. Solving System of simultaneous linear differential equations using ODE SOLVER
Laplace transforms
1. Symbolic computation of Laplace transform and Inverse Laplace transform
2. Plotting Laplace transforms
Fourier Series
1. Symbolic computation of Fourier Coefficients
2. Computation of harmonics
3. Plotting truncated Fourier Series
Fourier Transform
1. Symbolic computation of Fourier Transforms
2. Plotting truncated Fourier Transforms
Z – transform
1. Symbolic computation of Z-Transforms

46
 CO – PO Mapping:

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
Course
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 P11 P12
CO 1 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 2 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 3 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 4 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 5 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 45th Edition, New
Delhi, 2020.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publications,
Reprint, 2008
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education2nd Edition,
5th Reprint, Delhi, 2009.
3. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”,Narosa
Publications, 5 th Edition, New Delhi, 2017.
4. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd,
7 th Edition, New Delhi , 2012.
5. Ramana B.V., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd., 11th
Reprint, New Delhi, 2010.

47
EC23C03 ELECTRONIC DEVICES L T P C

2 0 4 4

UNIT I ELECTRONIC STATES 6L

Quantum free electron theory - Fermi distribution and energy – Density of states– Energy bands in solids
– Conductors – Semiconductors – Insulators –– Electron effective mass – properties of conduction and
valence bands.
UNIT II CARRIERS AND DOPING 6L
Intrinsic concentration – intrinsic Fermi level – n and p type doping – density of carriers in extrinsic
semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductor Fermi energy level – degenerate and non-degenerate
semiconductors – Direct and Indirect band gap semiconductors.

UNIT III PN DIODE AND BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR 6L, 36P

PN junction diode, current equations, V-I characteristics, Zener Diode, Bipolar Junction Transistor- bipolar
transistor action, minority carrier distribution, Ebers Moll Model, Hybrid-pi model, large signal switching
characteristics, SiGe and hetro-junction, Applications of Diodes.

PRACTICALS:
• Characteristics of PN Junction Diode
• Zener diode Characteristics & Regulator using Zener diode
• Clipper and Clamper
• Common Emitter input-output Characteristics
• Common Base input-output Characteristics
• Common Collector input-output characteristics

UNIT IV FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS 6L,6P

Two terminal MOS structures, threshold voltage and charge distribution, capacitance-voltage
characteristics, MOSFET structures, I-V relationships, transconductance and substrate effects, non-ideal
effects, MOSFET scaling, threshold voltage modification due to short and narrow channel effects.

PRACTICALS:
• MOSFET Characteristics

UNIT V SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 6L,18P

SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, IGBT, LED, LCD, Photo transistor, Opto Coupler, Solar cell, MESFET, -Varactor
diode –Tunnel diode- LASER diode, UJT, LDR

PRACTICALS:
• SCR Characteristics
• UJT Characteristics
• Half wave Rectifier and Full wave rectifier Characteristics
48
 L+P :30 + 60 : 90 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Understand the basics of electronic states and energy band structure formation
CO2: Recognize the importance of carrier concentration and doping in semiconductors
CO3: Understand the operation and characteristics of PN junction and BJTs.
CO4: Comprehend the characteristics of the field effect transistors and special semiconductor devices.
CO5: Practically derive the semiconductor devices characteristics and analyse.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. [Link]. Semiconductor Device Fundamentals. Pearson, 2006

2. [Link] and [Link]. Semiconductor physics and devices. McGraw Hill Education, 2017

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. [Link], A. Damask and [Link]. Physics for Computer Science Students. SpringerVerlag, 2012.
2. Umesh Mishra and Jasprit Singh. Semiconductor Device Physics and Design. Springer, 2008.
3. Nandita Dasgupta and Amitava Dasgupta. Semiconductor Devices: Modelling and Technology. PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd. 2004
4. F.H. Mitchell, ‘ Introduction to Electronics Design” Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Lt, 1995.
5. Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky “ Electronic devices and circuit theory” , Pearson, 2009

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 1 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
Average 2.2 1.6 1 1 2 2 1

49
CY23C01 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LTPC
3 024
UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY
Water – sources and impurities – water quality parameters: colour, odour, pH, hardness, alkalinity, TDS,
COD, BOD, and heavy metals. Boiler feed water – requirement – troubles (scale & sludge, caustic
embrittlement, boiler corrosion and priming & foaming. Internal conditioning – phosphate, Calgon, and
carbonate treatment. External conditioning – demineralization. Municipal water treatment (screening,
sedimentation, coagulation, filtration, disinfection-ozonolysis, UV treatment, chlorination), Reverse Osmosis
– desalination.
PRACTICAL:
• Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as the primary standard
• Determination of alkalinity in the water sample.
• Determination of hardness of water by EDTA method.
• Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.

UNIT II NANOCHEMISTRY
Basics-distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; size-dependent properties (optical,
electrical, mechanical, magnetic and catalytic). Types –nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and
nanotube. Preparation of nanomaterials: sol-gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition,
electrochemical deposition and electro-spinning. Characterization - Scanning Electron Microscope and
Transmission Electron Microscope - Principle and instrumentation (block diagram). Applications of
nanomaterials – medicine including AYUSH, automobiles, electronics, and cosmetics.
PRACTICAL:
• Preparation of nanoparticles by Sol-Gel method/sonication method.
• Preparation of nanowire by Electrospinning.
• Study of morphology of nanomaterials by scanning electron microscopy

UNIT III CORROSION SCIENCE

Introduction to corrosion – chemical and electrochemical corrosions – mechanism of electrochemical and
galvanic corrosions – concentration cell corrosion-soil, pitting, inter-granular, water line, stress and
microbiological corrosions-galvanic series-factors influencing corrosion- measurement of corrosion rate.
Electrochemical protection – sacrificial anodic protection and impressed current cathodic protection.
Protective coatings-metallic coatings (galvanizing, tinning), organic coatings (paints). Paints: Constituents
and functions.
PRACTICAL:
• Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
• Salt spray test for corrosion study.
• Corrosion prevention by electroplating.
50
 • Estimation of corroded Iron by Potentiometry/UV-visible spectrophotometer
UNIT IV ENERGY SOURCES
Electrochemical cell, redox reaction, electrode potential – oxidation and reduction potential. Batteries –
Characteristics; types of batteries; primary battery (dry cell), secondary battery (lead acid, lithium-ion battery)
and their applications. Emerging energy sources – metal hydride battery, hydrogen energy, Fuel cells – H2-
O2 fuel cell. Supercapacitors –Types and Applications, Renewable Energy: solar heating and solar cells.
Recycling and disposal of batteries.
PRACTICAL:
• Study of components of Lead acid battery.
• Measurement of voltage in a photovoltaic cell.
• Working of H2 – O2 fuel cell

UNIT V POLYMER CHEMISTRY

Introduction: Functionality-degree of polymerization. Classification of polymers (Source, Structure, Synthesis
and Intermolecular forces). Mechanism of free radical addition polymerization. Properties of polymers: Tg,
tacticity, molecular weight-number average, weight average, viscosity average and polydispersity index
(Problems). Techniques of polymerization: Bulk, emulsion, solution and suspension. Compounding and
Fabrication Techniques: Injection, Extrusion, Blow and Calendaring. Polyamides, Polycarbonates and
Polyurethanes – structure and applications. Recycling of polymers.
PRACTICAL:
• Determination of molecular weight of a polymer using Ostwald viscometer.
• Preparation of a polymer.
• Determination of molecular weight by Gel Permeation Chromatography.

TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: To demonstrate knowledge of water quality in various industries and develop skills in
analyzing water quality parameters for both domestic and industrial purposes.
CO2: To identify and apply fundamental concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology for engineering and
technology applications, and to develop skills in synthesizing nanomaterials and studying their
morphology.
CO3: To apply fundamental knowledge of corrosion protection techniques and develop skills
to conduct experiments for measuring and preventing corrosion.
CO4: To study the fundamentals of energy storage devices and develop skills in constructing
and experimenting with batteries.
CO5: To recognize and apply basic knowledge of different types of polymeric materials and
develop skills in preparing and determining their applications for futuristic material
fabrication needs.
51
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain P. C. & Monica Jain., “Engineering Chemistry”, 17th Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2012.
3. Dara S.S., “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, Chand Publications, 2004.
4. Laboratory Manual - Department of Chemistry, CEGC, Anna University (2023).

REFERENCES:
1. Schdeva M.V., “Basics of Nano Chemistry”, Anmol Publications Pvt Ltd, 2011.
2. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Medtech, 2014.
3. Gowariker V.R., Viswanathan N.V. and Jayadev Sreedhar, “Polymer Science” New AGE
International Publishers, 2009.
4. Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8th edition, 2014).

CO - PO Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - -
CO2 3 - 2 - 2 - 3 - - - - -
CO3 3 3 2 - 2 - 3 - - - - -
CO4 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - -
CO5 3 - - - - - 3 - - - - -
Avg 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - -
1’ = Low; ‘2’ = Medium; ‘3’ = High

52
EC23C0 DATASTRUCTURESANDPROGRAMMINGINC++ L T PC
6

2 0 4 4

UNIT I DATA ABSTRACTION & OVERLOADING 6L, 14P

Overview of C++ – Structures – Class Scope and Accessing Class Members – Reference
Variables – Initialization – Constructors – Destructors – Member Functions and Classes – Friend
Function – Dynamic Memory Allocation – Static Class Members – Container Classes and
Integrators – Proxy Classes – Overloading: Function overloading and Operator Overloading.
PRACTICALS:
• C++ Program to Implement Constructors and Destructors.
• C++ Program to implement Member Functions, Classes and Friend Functions.
• C++ Program to Implement Dynamic Memory Allocation and Overloading.

UNIT II INHERITANCE & POLYMORPHISM 6L,9P

Base Classes and Derived Classes – Protected Members – Casting Classpointers and Member
Functions – Overriding – Public, Protected and Private Inheritance–Constructors and Destructorsin
derived Classes – Implicit Derived – Class Object To Base – Class Object Conversion –
Composition Vs. Inheritance – Virtual functions – This Pointer – Abstract Base Classes and
Concrete Classes – Virtual Destructors – Dynamic Binding.
PRACTICALS:
• C++ Program to Implement Various Inheritances.
• C++ Program to Implement Virtual Functions and Dynamic Binding.

UNIT III LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 6L,14P

Asymptotic Notations: Big-Oh, Omega and Theta – Best, Worst and Average case Analysis:
Definitionandan example – Arraysand its representations – Stacks and Queues – Linked lists –Linked
list based implementation of Stacks and Queues – Evaluation of Expressions–Linked list based
polynomial addition.
PRACTICALS:
• C++ Program to Implement Various Operations on Arrays and Linked Lists.
• C++ Program to Implement Various Operations on Stacks and Queues using Array and Linked
List.
• C++ Program to Evaluate the Infix Expressions by converting into Prefix and Postfix Expressions.

53
UNIT IV NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 6L, 14P

Trees – Binary Trees – Binary tree representation and traversals – Threaded binarytrees – Binary
tree representation of trees – Application of trees: Set representation and Union - Find operations –Graph
and its representations – Graph Traversals – Connected components. Standard template library.
PRACTICALS:
• C++ Program to Implement Binary Tree Traversal and Graph Traversal Algorithm.
• C++ Program to Implement the Single Source Shortest Path Algorithm and All Pair Shortest Path
Algorithm.
• C++ Program to find the Minimal Spanning Tree for a Graph.

UNIT V SORTING & SEARCHING 6L, 9P

Insertionsort – Mergesort – Quicksort – Heapsort – Linear Search – Binary Search.

PRACTICALS:
• C++ Program to Implement Linear Search and Binary Search Algorithms.
• C++ Program to Implement Insertion Sort, Merge Sort, Quick Sort and Heap Sort Algorithms.

L+P : 30 +60 = 90 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world
CO2: Select and realize suitable data structure for specific Application.
CO3: Compare and realize Linear and nonlinear data structures for different application.
CO4: Implement different searching and sorting techniques.
CO5: Identify and realize connected components in trees.

TEXT BOOKS:
1.
Deitel and Deitel, “C++, How To Program”, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education, 2005
2. EllisHorowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++, 2nd
edition, Universities Press PvtLtd., Hyderabad, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Mark AllenWeiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Third Edition, Addison-
54
 Wesley, 2007.
2. Bhushan Trivedi, “Programming with ANSIC++, AStep-By-Stepapproach”, Oxford University
Press, 2010.
3. Goodrich, MichaelT., Rober to Tamassia, “DavidMount. “ Data Structures and Algorithms in
C++”, 7th edition, Wiley. 2004.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 1
Average 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 1

55
EC23C04 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS L T P C

3 0 2 4

UNIT I DC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 9L, 6P

Basic Components of electric Circuits, Charge, current, Voltage and Power, Voltage and Current Sources,
Ohms Law, Kirchoff‘s Current Law, Kirchoff‘s voltage law, The single Node – Pair Circuit, series and
Parallel Connected Independent Sources, Resistors in Series and Parallel, voltage and current division,
Nodal analysis & Mesh analysis for independent and dependent sources. Super Mesh, Super Node.

PRACTICALS:

• Verification of Mesh Analysis for DC Circuits.

• Verification of Nodal Analysis for DC Circuits.

UNIT II NETWORK THEOREM AND DUALITY 9L, 6P

Principle of Linearity. Superposition Theorem, Reciprocity Theorem, Thevenin and Norton Equivalent
Circuits, Maximum Power Transfer Theorem for dependent and independent sources. Delta-Wye
Conversion. Duals, Dual circuits.

PRACTICALS:

• Verification of Thevenin, Maximum Power Transfer Theorems for DC Circuits.

• Verification of Super Position & Norton Theorems for DC Circuits.

UNIT III SINUSOIDAL STEADY STATE ANALYSIS 9L, 6P

Sinusoidal Steady – State analysis, Characteristics of Sinusoids, The Complex Forcing Function, The
Phasor, Phasor relationship for R, L, and C, impedance and Admittance, Nodal and Mesh Analysis, Phasor
Diagrams, AC Circuit Power Analysis, Instantaneous Power, Average Power, apparent Power and Power
Factor, Complex Power.

PRACTICALS:

• Verify mesh and nodal analysis for AC circuits using EDA Tools.
• Determine phasor relationship, real power (P), reactive power (Q), apparent power (S) and
power factor in AC circuits using EDA Tools.

UNIT IV TRANSIENTS AND RESONANCE IN RLC CIRCUITS 9L, 6P

Basic RL and RC Circuits, The Source- Free RL Circuit, The Source-Free RC Circuit, The Unit-Step
Function, Driven RL Circuits, Driven RC Circuits, RLC Circuits, Frequency Response, Parallel Resonance,
Series Resonance, Quality Factor.

PRACTICALS:

• Study of DC transients in RL and RC circuits.

56
 • Determination of Resonant Frequency of Series & Parallel RLC Circuits.

UNIT V TOPOLOGY & COUPLED CIRCUITS 9L, 6P

Magnetically Coupled Circuits, mutual Inductance, the Linear Transformer, the Ideal Transformer,
Anintroduction to Network Topology, Trees and General Nodal analysis, Links and Loop analysis.

PRACTICALS:

• Simulation and verification of coupling coefficient and number of turns in coil using EDA Tools.
• Simulation and verification of self and mutual inductance of coupled circuits using EDA Tools.

L+T+P :45+30 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hayt JackKemmerly, Steven Durbin, "Engineering Circuit Analysis",Mc Graw Hill education,
9th Edition, 2018.
2. Robert.L. Boylestead, "Introductory Circuit Analysis", Pearson Education India, 12th Edition,
2014.

REFERENCES:

1. Charles K. Alexander & Mathew [Link], "Fundamentals of Electric Circuits", Mc Graw- Hill, 2
nd Edition, 2003.
2. [Link], J.A. Stuller, "Basic Circuit Analysis", Jaico Publishing House, 2005.
3. David Bell, "Fundamentals of Electric Circuits", Oxford University press, 7 th Edition, 2009.
4. [Link], Mathew [Link]," Fundamentals of Electric Circuits", McGraw Hill, 5th
Edition, 2012.
5. John O Mallay, Schaum’s Outlines "Basic Circuit Analysis", The Mc Graw Hill companies, 2nd
Edition, 2011.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Ability to apply, construct and validate the basic laws for DC and AC circuits Analysis.

CO2: Ability to apply, construct and validate Network Theorems in DC and AC circuits.

CO3: Ability to design, analyse and implement AC circuits for phase relationship and power
calculation.

CO4: Ability to design and analyse first and second order AC circuits.

CO5: Ability to implement and analyse inductively coupled circuits and analyse two port
networks.

57
 ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2

CO 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
1

CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 1
2

CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 1
3

CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 1
4

CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 1
5

3 2.8 2.4 2.2 2 2 1

58
UC23H02 தமிழரும் மதொழில் நுட்பமும் L T P C
1 0 0 1

அலகு I மநசவு மற் றும் பொறனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் தநெவுத் ததொழில் – பொமனத் ததொழில் நுட்பம் - கருப் பு சிவப்பு
பொண்டங் கள் – பொண்டங் களில் கீறல் குறியீடுகள் .

அலகு II வடிவறமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் வடிவமமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டுமொனங் கள் & ெங் க கொலத்தில் வீட்டுப்
தபொருட்களில் வடிவமமப் பு- ெங் க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன தபொருட்களும் நடுகல் லும் –
சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மமமட அமமப் பு பற் றிய விவரங் கள் - மொமல் லபுரெ் சிற் பங் களும் ,
மகொவில் களும் – மெொழர் கொலத்துப் தபருங் மகொயில் கள் மற் றும் பிற வழிபொட்டுத் தலங் கள்
– நொயக்கர் கொலக் மகொயில் கள் - மொதிரி கட்டமமப் புகள் பற் றி அறிதல் , மதுமர மீனொட்சி
அம் மன் ஆலயம் மற் றும் திருமமல நொயக்கர் மஹொல் – தெட்டிநொட்டு வீடுகள் – பிரிட்டிஷ்
கொலத்தில் தென்மனயில் இந்மதொ-ெொமரொதெனிக் கட்டிடக் கமல.

அலகு III உற் பத்தித் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

கப் பல் கட்டும் கமல – உமலொகவியல் – இரும் புத் ததொழிற் ெொமல – இரும் மப உருக்குதல் ,
எஃகு – வரலொற் றுெ் ெொன்றுகளொக தெம் பு மற் றும் தங் க நொணயங் கள் – நொணயங் கள்
அெ்ெடித்தல் – மணி உருவொக்கும் ததொழிற் ெொமலகள் – கல் மணிகள் , கண்ணொடி மணிகள்
– சுடுமண் மணிகள் – ெங் கு மணிகள் – எலும் புத்துண்டுகள் – ததொல் லியல் ெொன்றுகள் –
சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மணிகளின் வமககள் .

அலகு IV கவளொை்றம மற் றும் நீ ர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

அமண, ஏரி, குளங் கள் , மதகு – மெொழர்கொலக் குமுழித் தூம் பின் முக்கியத்துவம் –
கொல் நமட பரொமரிப் பு – கொல் நமடகளுக்கொக வடிவமமக்கப் பட்ட கிணறுகள் –
மவளொண்மம மற் றும் மவளொண்மமெ் ெொர்ந்த தெயல் பொடுகள் – கடல் ெொர் அறிவு –
மீன்வளம் – முத்து மற் றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – தபருங் கடல் குறித்த பண்மடய அறிவு –
அறிவுெொர் ெமூகம் .

அலகு V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற் றும் கைித்தமிழ் : 3

அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ெ்சி –கணித்தமிழ் வளர்ெ்சி - தமிழ் நூல் கமள மின்பதிப் பு
தெய் தல் – தமிழ் தமன் தபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இமணயக் கல் விக்கழகம் – தமிழ்
மின் நூலகம் – இமணயத்தில் தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் – தெொற் குமவத் திட்டம் .
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு: தமிழ் நொடு
பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
59
 தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by: International Institute
of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by: International Institute
of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by: Department
of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link]) (Published by: The
Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and
Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference Book.

UC23H02 TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY L T P C

1 0 0 1

UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3

Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries (BRW) –
Graffiti on Potteries.

UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3

Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam Age -
Building materials and Hero stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in Silappathikaram -
Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and other worship places - Temples
of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)- Thirumalai Nayakar Mahal - Chetti Nadu
Houses, Indo - Saracenic architecture at Madras during British Period.

UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3

Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -Copper and gold- Coins as
source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone beads -Glass beads - Terracotta beads
-Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences - Gem stone types described in Silappathikaram.

UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3

Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry - Wells
designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea - Fisheries – Pearl - Conche
diving - Ancient Knowledge of Ocean - Knowledge Specific Society.

UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3

Development of Scientific Tamil - Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development of Tamil
Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries – Sorkuvai Project.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
60
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு: தமிழ் நொடு
பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils ([Link]) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period ([Link]) (Published by: International Institute
of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils ([Link], Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture ([Link]) (Published by: International Institute
of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by: Department
of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu ([Link]) (Published by: The
Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and
Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai ([Link]) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference Book.

61
MA23C03 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand Vector spaces and its basis and dimension.
• To understand the linear maps between vector spaces and their matrix representations.
• To understand the diagonalizatition of a real symmetric matrix.
• To understand Inner product spaces and its projections.
• To understand numerical techniques for solving linear systems, eigenvalue problems and
generalized inverses.

UNIT I VECTORSPACES 9+3

Vector Spaces – Subspaces – Linear Combinations - Linear Span – Linear Dependence -
Linear Independence – Bases and Dimensions.
UNIT II LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS 9+3
Linear Transformation – Null Space, Range Space - Dimension Theorem - Matrix
representation of Linear Transformation – Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of Linear
Transformation – Diagonalization of Linear Transformation – Application of Diagonalization in
Linear System of Differential Equations.
UNIT III INNER PRODUCT SPACES 9+3
Inner Products and Norms - Inner Product Spaces - Orthogonal Vectors – Gram Schmidt
Orthogonalization Process – Orthogonal Complement – Least Square Approximations.
UNIT IV NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF LINEAR SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS 9+3
Solution of Linear System of Equations – Direct Methods: Gauss Elimination Method – Pivoting,
Gauss Jordan Method, LU Decomposition Method and Cholesky Decomposition Method -
Iterative Methods: Gauss-Jacobi Method, Gauss-Seidel Method and SOR Method.
UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS AND 9+3
GENERALISED INVERSES
Eigen Value Problems: Power Method – Inverse Power Method – Jacobi’s Rotation Method -
QR Decomposition - Singular Value Decomposition Method.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Laboratory based exercises / assignments / assessments will be given to students from the content of the
course wherever applicable.

Branch specific / General Engineering applications based on the content of each units will be introduced
to students wherever possible.

62
Suggested Laboratory based exercises / assignments / assessments :
1. Linear independence/dependence of vectors
2. Computation of eigenvalues and eigenvectors
3. Diagonalization of Linear Transformation
4. Gram Schmidt Orthogonalization Process
5. Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations
6. Matrix Decomposition methods (LU / Cholesky Decomposition)
7. Iterative methods of Gauss-Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel
8. Matrix Inversion by Gauss-Jordan method
9. Eigen values of a matrix by Power method and by Jacobi’s method
10. QR decomposition method
11. Singular Value Decomposition Method

OUTCOMES:

CO1: Solve system of linear equations using matrix operations and vector spaces using
Algebraic methods.
CO2: Understand the linear maps between vector spaces and its utilities.
CO3: Apply the concept of inner product of spaces in solving problems.
CO4: Understand the common numerical methods and how they are used to obtain
approximate solutions
CO5: Analyse and evaluate the accuracy of common numerical methods.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Faires, J.D. and Burden, R., “Numerical Methods”, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Publications),
Fourth Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Friedberg, S.H., Insel, A.J. and Spence, E., “Linear Algebra”, Pearson Education, Fifth
Edition, New Delhi, 2018.
3. Williams, G, “Linear Algebra with Applications”, Jones & Bartlett Learning, First Indian
Edition, New Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, “Introductory Linear Algebra”, Pearson Education, First
Reprint, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Gerald, C.F, and Wheatley, P.O., “Applied Numerical Analysis”, Pearson Education,
Seventh Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Kumaresan, S., “Linear Algebra – A geometric approach”, Prentice – Hall of India, Reprint,
New Delhi, 2010.
4. Richard Branson, "Matrix Operations”, Schaum's outline series, Mc Graw Hill, New York,
1989.
5. Strang, G., “Linear Algebra and its applications”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2005.
63
 CO – PO Mapping:

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
Course
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 P11 P12

CO 1 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 2 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 3 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 4 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 5 : 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3

64
EC23301 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT– I INTRODUCTION 9L,

Electromagnetic model, Units and constants, of vector algebra, Rectangular, cylindrical and spherical
coordinate systems, Line, surface and volume integrals, Gradient of a scalar field, Divergence of a
vector field, Divergence theorem, Curl of a vector field, Stoke's theorem

UNIT– II STATIC ELECTRIC FIELD 9L,

Electric field, Coulomb's law, Gauss's law and applications, Electric potential, Conductors in static
electric field, Dielectrics in static electric field, Electric flux density and dielectric constant, Boundary
conditions, Electrostatic energy, Poisson's and Laplace's equations, Capacitance of various geometries
(parallel plate, cylindrical and spherical), Current density and Ohm's law, Electromotive force and
Kirchhoff's voltage law, Equation of continuity and Kirchhoff's current law.

UNIT–III STATIC MAGNETIC FIELD 9L,

Lorentz force equation, Law of no magnetic monopoles, Ampere's law, Vector magnetic potential, Biot-
Savart law and applications, Magnetic field intensity and relative permeability, Magnetic circuits,
behaviour of magnetic materials, Boundary conditions, Inductance and inductors, Magnetic energy,
Magnetic forces and torque

UNIT– IV TIME VARYING FIELDS AND MAXWELL EQUATIONS 9L,

Faraday's law, Displacement current and Maxwell-Ampere law, Maxwell's equations, Potential
functions, Electromagnetic boundary conditions, Wave equations and solutions, Time-harmonic fields

UNIT– V PLANE EM WAVES IN ISOTROPIC MEDIA 9L,

Plane waves in lossless media, Plane waves in lossy media (low-loss dielectrics and good conductors),
Group velocity, Electromagnetic power flow and Poynting vector, Normal incidence at a plane
conducting boundary, Normal incidence at a plane dielectric boundary.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
1. Ability to understand the vector calculus and basic EM theorems
2. Ability to the understand the basic laws and concepts of static electric field
3. Ability to the understand the basic laws and concepts of static magnetic field.
4. Ability to the understand the Maxwells equation and nature of time varying fields
5. Ability to the understand the nature of plane waves incident on different media.

65
REFERENCES:
1. Cheng D.K., Field and wave electromagnetics, Pearson Education, Second Edition 1989.
(Unit I to V).
2. Griffiths D.J, Introduction to Electrodynamics, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition 2013.
3. Notaros B.M, Electromagnetics, Pearson, New Jersey, 2011
4. Hayt W.H and Buck J.A, Engineering electromagnetics, McGraw-Hill (India), seventh Edition, 2006.
5. Sadiku M.N.O and Kulkarni S.V, Principles of electromagnetics, Oxford (Asian Edition), Sixth Edition,
2015.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
Average 3 3 3 1.8 1 1 1 1

66
EC23C13 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I BASIC CONCEPTS IN DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN 9L, 4P

Review of number systems – Representation - Conversions, Review of Boolean algebra - Theorems,
Canonical forms and Standard forms -Implementation of Boolean expressions using universal gates,
Simplification of Boolean expressions, Karnaugh map, Tabulation methods.
PRACTICALS:
Verification of logic expressions

UNIT– II DESIGN OF COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 9L, 16P

Code-Converters, Half and Full Adders, Binary Parallel Adder – Carry look ahead Adder, BCD Adder,
Magnitude Comparator, Decoder, Encoder, Building Encoders with basic size, Priority Encoder,
Multiplexer, Demultiplexer.
PRACTICALS:
• Design and verification of adders / subtractors.
• Design and verification of BCD adder, BCD to seven segment display decoder.
• Design and implementation of multiplexers / demultiplexers.
• Design and implementation encoders / decoders.

UNIT–III DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9L, 10P

Latches, Flip flops – SR, JK, T, D, Master/Slave FF, Triggering of FF, Analysis and design of clocked
sequential circuits – Design - Moore/Mealy models, State minimization, State assignment, Counters,
Ripple Counters, Ring Counters, Shift registers, Universal Shift Register. Use cases
PRACTICALS:
• Design of counters – 4-bit ripple counter / ring counter.
• Design of universal shift register.

UNIT– IV DESIGN OF ASYNHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9L

Analysis - Stable and unstable states, Cycles and races, Design of Fundamental mode sequential
circuits - State reduction, Race free assignments, Hazards and its types, Design of Hazard free circuits.
Use cases

UNIT– V MOS LOGIC FAMILY AND PLDs 9L

MOS Logic families and parameters - Propagation delay, Fan-in and Fan-out, Noise Margin,
Implementation of Inverter, NAND, NOR using CMOS logic, Realization of combinational
logic/sequential logic design, using standard ICs, PLDs - PROM, PLA, PAL and CPLD.
TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will have
1. Ability to apply Boolean algebra and simplification procedure in digital logic systems.
67
2. Ability to design combinational digital circuits using logic gates.
3. Ability to analyze and design synchronous sequential circuits.
4. Ability to analyze and design asynchronous sequential circuits.
5. Ability to design digital circuits using MOS and PLDs.

REFERENCES:
1. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, ‘Digital Design: With an Introduction to the Verilog HDL, VHDL,
and System Verilog, 6e’, Pearson, 6th Edition, 2018.
2. Charles H. Roth, Jr. and Larry L. Kinney, ‘Fundamentals of Logic Design’, Cengage Learning, 7th
Edition, 2014.
3. William I. Fletcher, "An Engineering Approach to Digital Design - softcover", Prentice- Hall of India,
2015.
4. Floyd T.L., "Digital Fundamentals", 11th Edition by Pearson Education, 2020.
5. John. F. Wakerly, "Digital Design Principles and Practices", Pearson Education, 5th Edition, 2018.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 1 1
Average 2.8 2.4 2.5 2 1 1 1

68
EC23302 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT– I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9L

Continuous time signals (CT signals)- Discrete time signals (DT signals) –Continuous time elementary
signals: Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Exponential –Signal Operations- classification of CT Signals–
Even and odd signals, periodic and aperiodic signals, random signals, Energy & Power signals - CT
systems, Classification of CT systems.

UNIT– II SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9L

Fourier series, Fourier transforms: properties – Spectral analysis of continuous time signals- Frequency
response of continuous time LTI systems.

UNIT–III CHARACTERIZATION OF CONTINUOUS TIME LTI SYSTEMS 9L

Differential Equation - impulse response, convolution integrals- Laplace transform: properties and
application in continuous time signal and system analysis

UNIT– IV SAMPLING 9L
Baseband Sampling of CT signals– spectral analysis of sampled signals –analysis of Aliasing effects
due to under-sampling - Types of samplers: ideal sampling, natural sampling, flat top sampling -
distortion analysis

UNIT– V ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME RANDOM SIGNALS 9L

Basics of Probability, Random variables, Statistical averages, Correlations, Central limit theorem,
Random Process, Stationary Processes, WSS process, Power Spectral Density, Ergodic Processes,
Gaussian Process, Transmission of a Random signal through an LTI filter, Output of LTI system with
Gaussian input.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
1. Classify signals and systems based on various characteristics and decomposition for easier
analysis.
2. Analyze frequency components of signals and frequency response of LTI systems.
3. Analyze the causality and stability LTI systems from their impulse responses.
4. Convert the CT signals into DT signals and analyze the effect of sampling and frequency content
of sampled signals.
5. Analyze the processing of random signals with LTI systems.

69
 REFERENCES:
1. Allan [Link], [Link] and [Link], "Signals and Systems", Pearson, Indian
Reprint,2007.
2. B. P. Lathi, "Principles of Linear Systems and Signals", Oxford, 2nd Edition,2009.
3. H P Hsu, "Signals and Systems", Schaum‘s Outlines, Tata McGrawHill,2006.
4. S. Haykin and B. Van Veen, "Signals and Systems", 2nd Edition, Wiley,2003
5. [Link] Rao, "Signals and Systems", Tata Mc Graw Hill Publications, 2nd Edition, 2008.
6. Dward W. Kamen, Bonnie S. Heck, "Fundamentals of Signals and Systems, Using the Web and
MATLAB”, Pearson, Indian Reprint, 3rd Edition,2007.
7. John Alan Stuller, "An Introduction to Signals and Systems", Thomson,2007.
8. [Link], "Signals & Systems, Analysis, using Transform methods MATLAB”, Tata McGraw
Hill (India),2007.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 1 1 1
Average 3 2.4 1 1 1

70
EC23C02 ANALOG CIRCUITS DESIGN L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I BIASING OF DISCRETE BJT AND MOSFET 9L

DC Loadline, operating point, Various biasing methods for BJT-Design-Stability-Bias compensation,
Thermal stability, DC bias analysis of MOSFET circuits.
• Loadline analysis of BJT amplifier.

UNIT– II DISCRETE BJT AMPLIFIERS 9L,20P

Small signal Analysis of Common Emitter - AC Loadline, Voltage swing limitations, Common Collector
and common base amplifiers – Differential amplifiers – CMRR - Darlington Amplifier - Multi stage
amplifiers - Cascode Amplifier.
PRACTICALS:
• Frequency Response characteristics of C Eamplifier.
• Frequency Response characteristics of C Bamplifier.
• Design of CC Amplifier for a specific output impedance.
• Design of Differential Amplifiers and its CMRR measurement.
UNIT–III DISCRETE MOSFET AMPLIFIERS 9L
Small signal Analysis of amplifiers - Common source amplifier, Voltage swing limitations, Small signal
analysis of Source follower and Common Gate amplifiers, Cascode amplifiers, Differential amplifiers

UNIT– IV FREQUENCY ANALYSIS OF BJT AND MOSFET AMPLIFIERS 9L,6P

Short circuit current gain, cutoff frequency–fα, fβ of BJT, Unity Gain Bandwidth of BJT and MOSFET,
Low frequency analysis, Miller effect, High frequency analysis of single stage BJT and MOSFET
amplifiers.
PRACTICALS:
• Frequency response characteristics of Cascode amplifier.
UNIT– V IC MOSFET Amplifiers 9L,4P
IC biasing Current steering circuits for IC amplifiers - current mirrors, - current sources - PMOS and
NMOS current sources, Cascode current source, Wilson current source. Amplifier with resistive load,
activeload - Depletion load, Differential amplifiers with active load.

PRACTICALS:
• Spice simulation of CS, CG, and CD configuration of MOSFET amplifiers with various active
load configurations.
TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
71
1. Choose appropriate biasing circuits for BJT and MOSFET discrete amplifiers
2. Design and analyze single stage and multistage BJT amplifiers
3. Analyze the characteristic of MOSFET amplifiers, the effect of source and load.
4. Analyze the high frequency response of BJT and MOSFET amplifiers
5. Design and analyze IC MOSFET amplifiers

REFERENCES:
1. Donald. A. Neamen,"Micro Electronics: Circuit Analysis and Design", 4th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2021.
2. Adel. S. Sedra, [Link],"Micro Electronic Circuits: Theory and Applications", 7thEdition,
Oxford University Press,2017
3. Behzad Razavi, "Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits", TataMcGrawHill,2017.
4. Paul Gray, Hurst, Lewis, Meyer, "Analysis andDesign of Analog Integrated Circuits", JohnWilley
& Sons, 5th Edition,2009.
5. Millman.J,HalkiasC.C and Chetan Parikh "Integrated Electronics-", 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill,
2017.
6. Paul Horowitz, Winfield Hill, “The Art of Electronis”, Cambridge University Press, 3rd Edition,
2015 (Reference for Lab).

ARTICULATION MATRIX:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
Average 3 2.8 2.8 2.8 1 1 1 1

72
EC23S01 NUMERICAL AND SIGNAL PROCESSING PRACTICE L T P C
THROUGH PYTHON
1 0 2 2
Introduction to Python – Data types – Variables – Functions – Flow Control and branching statements
- Manipulating Strings - Accepting User Input – Lists -Tuples – Dictionaries - Reading and Writing Files
– Modules – Debugging - Introduction to Numpy – Matplotlib - Scipy.
LIST OF PRACTICAL EXERCISES:
1. Getting Started with Python and using the Plot command
2. Load data from files and Plotting data
3. Getting Started with Lists
4. Getting started with for, If, While loops
5. Getting started with files and arrays
6. Statistics using Python
7. Linear combination of vectors and Computation of determinant, rank of a matrix
8. Lower - Upper Decomposition of vectors
9. Gauss-Seidel Method
10. Solve Systems of Linear Equations in Python
[Link] and eigenvectors in Python
[Link] of basic sequences using Python
[Link] analysis of signals
[Link] of continuous-time signals
TOTAL:45PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
1. Develop and execute simple Python programs.
2. Apply the best features available in Python to solve the situational problems
3. Develop code for numerical methods computation using Python
4. Generate and analyse the basic signals using Python

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021
2. Qingkai Kong, Timmy Siauw and Alexandre M. Bayen, “Python Programming and Numerical
Methods”, Elsevier Academic Press, 2021
3. Fatos Tunay Yarman Vural, and Emre Akbas, “Signals and Systems: Theory and Practical
Explorations with Python”, John Wiley, 2024

73
ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - 1 1
Average 3 3 3 3 2.75 0.5 - - - - 1.5 1.75

74
UC23U01 UNIVERSAL HUMAN VALUES LTPC

1 02 2
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the course is four-fold:
1. Development of a holistic perspective based on self-exploration about themselves
(human being), family, society and nature/existence.
2. Understanding (or developing clarity) of the harmony in the human being, family, society
and nature/existence
3. Strengthening of self-reflection.
4. Development of commitment and courage to act.

Module I: Introduction (3L,6P)

Purpose and motivation for the course, recapitulation from Universal Human Values-I, Self-Exploration– Its
content and process; ‘Natural acceptance’ and Experiential Validation- as the process for self-exploration
Continuous Happiness and Prosperity- A look at basic Human Aspirations Right understanding, Relationship
and Physical Facility- the basic requirements for fulfilment of aspirations of every human being with their
correct priority Understanding Happiness and Prosperity correctly- A critical appraisal of the current scenario,
Method to fulfil the above human aspirations: understanding and living in harmony at various levels.

Practical Session: Include sessions to discuss natural acceptance in human being as the innate
acceptance for living with responsibility (living in relationship, harmony and co-existence) rather than as
arbitrariness in choice based on liking-disliking
Module II: Harmony in the Human Being (3L,6P)
Understanding human being as a co-existence of the sentient ‘I’ and the material ‘Body’, Understanding
the needs of Self (‘I’) and ‘Body’ - happiness and physical facility, Understanding the Body as an instrument
of ‘I’ (I being the doer, seer and enjoyer), Understanding the characteristics and activities of ‘I’ and harmony
in ‘I’, Understanding the harmony of I with the Body: Sanyam and Health; correct appraisal of Physical
needs, meaning of Prosperity in detail, Programs to ensure Sanyam and Health.

Practical Session: Include sessions to discuss the role others have played in making material goods
available to me. Identifying from one’s own life. Differentiate between prosperity and accumulation.
Discuss program for ensuring health vs dealing with disease.
Module III: Harmony in the Family and Society (3L,6P)
Understanding values in human-human relationship; meaning of Justice (nine universal values in
relationships) and program for its fulfilment to ensure mutual happiness; Trust and Respect as the
foundational values of relationship, Understanding the meaning of Trust; Difference between intention and
competence, Understanding the meaning of Respect, Difference between respect and differentiation; the
other salient values in relationship, Understanding the harmony in the society (society being an extension
of family): Resolution, Prosperity, fearlessness (trust) and co-existence as comprehensive Human Goals,

75
Visualizing a universal harmonious order in society- Undivided Society, Universal Order- from family to
world family.

Practical Session: Include sessions to reflect on relationships in family, hostel and institute as extended
family, real life examples, teacher-student relationship, goal of education etc. Gratitude as a universal value
in relationships. Discuss with scenarios. Elicit examples from students’ lives
Module IV: Harmony in the Nature and Existence (3L,6P)
Understanding the harmony in the Nature, Interconnectedness and mutual fulfilment among the four orders
of nature- recyclability and self regulation in nature, Understanding Existence as Co-existence of mutually
interacting units in all- pervasive space, Holistic perception of harmony at all levels of existence.

Practical Session: Include sessions to discuss human being as cause of imbalance in nature (film “Home”
can be used), pollution, depletion of resources and role of technology etc.

Module V: Implications of Harmony on Professional Ethics (3L,6P)

Natural acceptance of human values, Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct, Basis for Humanistic
Education, Humanistic Constitution and Humanistic Universal Order, Competence in professional ethics: a.
Ability to utilize the professional competence for augmenting universal human order b. Ability to identify the
scope and characteristics of people friendly and eco-friendly production systems, c. Ability to identify and
develop appropriate technologies and management patterns for above production systems. Case studies of
typical holistic technologies, management models and production systems, Strategy for transition from the
present state to Universal Human Order: a. At the level of individual: as socially and ecologically responsible
engineers, technologists and managers b. At the level of society: as mutually enriching institutions and
organizations, Sum up.

Practical Session: Include Exercises and Case Studies will be taken up in Sessions E.g. To discuss the
conduct as an engineer or scientist etc.

TOTAL: 45 (15 Lectures + 30 Practicals) PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOME:
By the end of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Become more aware of themselves, and their surroundings (family, society, nature);
2. Have more responsible in life, and in handling problems with sustainable solutions, while
keeping human relationships and human nature in mind.
3. Have better critical ability.
4. Become sensitive to their commitment towards what they have understood (human values,
human relationship and human society).
5. Apply what they have learnt to their own self in different day-to-day settings in real life, at least a
beginning would be made in this direction.

REFERENCES:

76
 1. Human Values and Professional Ethics by R R Gaur, R Sangal, G P Bagaria, Excel Books, New
Delhi, 3rd revised edition, 2023.
2. Jeevan Vidya: Ek Parichaya, A Nagaraj, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, Amarkantak, 1999.
3. Human Values, A.N. Tripathi, New Age Intl. Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
4. The Story of Stuff (Book).
5. The Story of My Experiments with Truth - by Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi
6. Small is Beautiful - E. F Schumacher.
7. Slow is Beautiful - Cecile Andrews.
8. Economy of Permanence - J C Kumarappa
9. Bharat Mein Angreji Raj - PanditSunderlal
10. Rediscovering India - by Dharampal
11. Hind Swaraj or Indian Home Rule - by Mohandas K. Gandhi
12. India Wins Freedom - Maulana Abdul Kalam Azad
13. Vivekananda - Romain Rolland (English)
14. Gandhi - Romain Rolland (English)

Web URLs:
1. Class preparations: [Link]
2. Lecture presentations: [Link]
3. Practice and Tutorial Sessions: [Link]

Articulation Matrix:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 1 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 3

77
EC23401 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I CLASSIFICATION OF DT SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9L,8P

Discrete time signals (DT signals) – Step, Ramp, Impulse, Exponential - Classification of DT signals –
periodic and aperiodic signals, random signals, Energy & Power signals - DT systems, Classification of
DT systems, Convolution Sum: Linear and Circular, Overlap-add & overlap-save methods
PRACTICALS:
• Generation of sequences
• Linear and Circular Convolution

UNIT– II SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND 9L,3P

SYSTEMS
Introduction to Discrete Fourier Series, DTFT: properties and Spectral analysis of discrete time signals
- DFT and its properties, FFT algorithms & its applications, Frequency response of discrete time LTI
systems.
PRACTICALS:
• Spectral analysis of signals using DFT

UNIT–III CHARACTERIZATION OF DISCRETE TIME LTI SYSTEMS 9L,3P

Difference Equations-Impulse response-Z-transform & its ROC: properties and application in discrete
time signal and system analysis.
PRACTICALS:
• Pole Zero analysis of Discrete Time systems

UNIT– IV DESIGN OF INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9L,6P

Transfer functions of continuous time systems (analog filters)-Transformation of analog filters into
equivalent digital filters using Impulse invariant method and Bilinear Transformation method-
Realization structures for IIR filters – direct, cascade, parallel forms.
PRACTICALS:
• IIR filter design
• Frequency response of IIR system

UNIT– V DESIGN OF FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9L,10P

Design of linear phase FIR filters using windowing and Frequency sampling methods - Realization
structures for FIR filters – Transversal and Linear phase structures- Comparison of FIR & IIR.

78
 PRACTICALS:
• FIR filter design
• Frequency response of FIR system
• Signal Processing based Mini Project
TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Ability to Classify DT Signals and Systems
2. Ability to analyze DT signals and Systems in frequency domain
3. Ability to analyze DT Signals and Systems in Z - domain
4. Ability to design and analyze IIR filter
5. Ability to design and analyze FIR filter

REFERENCES:
1. [Link], R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, "Discrete Time Signal Processing", Pearson,
th
8 Indian Reprint,2004.
2. John G Proakis and Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing Principles Algorithms and
Applications”, Pearson, 4thEdition,2007.
3. [Link] and B.W. Jervis, "Digital Signal Processing A Practical Approach", Pearson,2002.
4. [Link], "Digital Signal Processing", Schaum’s outlines, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
5. S.K. Mitra," Digital Signal Processing", A Computer Based approach, Tata McGraw-Hill,1998.
6. D.J. De Fatta, [Link] and W.S. Hodgkiss, "Digital Signal Processing A system Design
Approach", John Wiley & sons, Singapore,1988
7. [Link], Multirate Systems & Filter Banks, Prentice Hall, Englewood cliffs, NJ,1993.
8. Tarun Kumar Rawat, “Digital Signal Processing’, Oxford University Press, 2015

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1
Average 3 2.4 3 3 1 1 1 1

EC23402 TRANSMISSION LINES L T P C

3 0 0 3
79
UNIT– I TRANSMISSION LINE FUNDAMENTALS 9L
General theory of Transmission lines - the transmission line general solution - The infinite line - the
distortionless line – Transmission line Loading - Input and transfer impedance - Reflection factor and
reflection loss, insertion loss – Introduction to planar transmission lines: Strip line, Slot line and
Microstrip line.

UNIT– II PASSIVE FILTERS 9L

Symmetrical networks: Characteristic impedance and propagation constant - Filter fundamentals: pass
and stop bands - Design of filters: constant k - lowpass, high pass, bandpass, bandstop, m-derived
sections - lowpass, high pass, bandpass filters – composite filters

UNIT–III LINE AT RADIO FREQUENCY & IMPEDANCE MATCHING 9L

Transmission line equations at radio frequencies – Input impedance of the dissipation-less line - Open
and short circuited lines – Reflection Phenomena – Standing waves – λ/8, λ/4 & λ/2 lines – λ/4
Impedance transformers, Stub Matching – Single and Double Stub – Smith Chart and Applications.

UNIT– IV WAVEGUIDES 9L
General Wave behaviors along uniform Guiding structures, Transverse Electromagnetic (TEM) waves,
Transverse Magnetic (TM) waves, Transverse Electric (TE) waves, TM and TE waves between parallel
plates, TM and TE waves in Rectangular wave guides – Circular wave guides.

UNIT– V PLANAR TRANSMISSION LINES AND SIGNAL INTEGRTY 9L

ISSUES
Mutual Inductance and Capacitance - Transmission line reflections – Lattice diagram – Time domain
reflectometry – Coupled Wave Equations - Coupled Line Analysis - Modal Analysis - Crosstalk
Minimization - Classic Conductor Model for Transmission models – Removal of Common Mode Noise
– Jitter analysis
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Comprehend the working of lossy and lossless transmission lines at radio frequencies.
2. Apply the knowledge of filter theory in the design of passive filters.
3. Solve transmission line problems using Smith chart
4. Analyze electric and magnetic field components in waveguides
5. Identify and resolve crosstalk in high-speed transmission lines

80
 REFERENCES:
1. John D Ryder, "Networks lines and fields", Prentice Hall of India, 2005.
2. Stephen H. Hall, Howard L. Heck, "Advanced SignalIntegrity ForHigh - Speed Digital Designs",
John Wiley & Sons, 2009
3. E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”, Prentice Hall
of India, 2011.
4. Bhag Singh Guru & Hüsey in R. Hiziroglu, “Electromagnetic Field Theory Fundamentals”,
Second edition Cambridge University press, 2005
5. R.K. Shevgaonkar, “Electromagnetic Waves”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2006
6. G. S. N Raju "Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines", Pearson Education India,
First edition, 2005.
7. Reinmut KHoffman, “Hand book of Micro wave Integrated Circuits”, Artech House, 1987.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 3 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 3
Average 3 2.6 2.8 1 1 1.8

81
EC23403 ANALOG AND BASEBAND COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I AMPLITUDE MODULATION 9L,5P

Review of Fourier and Hilbert Transforms- Amplitude Modulation – AM, DSBSC, SSBSC, VSB–Spectral
analysis of modulated signal, Detectors- Envelope, coherent Detection, Noise figure and Noise
Temperature, Noise in cascaded systems, Noise performance in AM (qualitative treatment only).
PRACTICALS:
• Spectral analysis of AM signals over modulation index.
UNIT– II ANGLE MODULATION 9L,5P
Angle modulation and demodulation: Narrow band, Wideband FM - Spectral analysis of modulated
signal, Frequency Discriminator, Superheterodyne receiver principle, Noise performance in FM
(qualitative treatment only).
PRACTICALS:
• Spectral analysis of FM signals over modulation index

UNIT–III PULSE MODULATION 9L,10P

Schematic of digital communication systems, Sampling - Quantization – Uniform and non-uniform
quantization – Quantization noise– Companding laws of speech signals, Speech Coders:, PCM, DPCM,
ADPCM, DM, ADM.
PRACTICALS:
• Evaluation of SQNR vs number of bits
• Encoding & decoding of signals using DM

UNIT– IV INFORMATION THEORY 9L,5P

Measure of information – Entropy – Source coding theorem – Discrete memoryless channels –lossless,
deterministic, noiseless, BEC, BSC – Mutual information – Channel capacity – Statement of Shannon-
Hartley law - Source Coding: Shannon-Fano coding, Huffman Coding.
PRACTICALS:
• Encoding and decoding using Shannon Fano and Huffman algorithms

UNIT– V BASEBAND WAVEFORMS OF DIGITAL SIGNALING 9L,5P

Line codes RZ, NRZ – Unipolar, Polar, Bipolar, Manchester, Binary N-zero substitution codes PSDs,
ISI Nyquist Criterion- Pulse shaping Correlative coding- Eye pattern,

PRACTICALS:
• Generation and spectral analysis of NRZ, RZ and Manchester coded signals

TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS

82
 COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Ability to develop and analyse amplitude modulation system.
2. Ability to develop and analyse angle modulation system.
3. Ability to analyze pulse modulation schemes.
4. Ability to understand the basics of Information Theory and source coding schemes.
5. Ability to understand and analyze digital base band signaling techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. Haykin, "Communication Systems", John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2007
2. J.G. Proakis, M. Salehi, "Fundamentals of Communication Systems", Pearson Education 2006
3. Siman Haykin, “Digital Communication”, Wiley standard Edition, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. HP Hsu, Schaum Outline Series, "Analog and Digital Communications", TMH 2006
2. B. P. Lathi, "Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems", Oxford University Press, 3rd
Edition, 2007
3. B. Sklar, "Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications", Pearson Education 2nd
Edition,2007.
4. [Link].J. Coolen,"ElectronicCommunications", PHI, 4thEdition, 2006.
5. V. Chandra Sekar, "Analog Communication", Oxford University Press, 2012.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 1
Average 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 1

83
EC23C05 ANALOG ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS DESIGN L T P C
3 0 2 4
UNIT– I FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND STABILITY 9L,3P
Basic feedback concepts – Properties of Negative feedback – Feedback topologies– Analysis of
feedback amplifiers – stability analysis on amplifier – Gain and Phase-margins- Frequency
compensation.
PRACTICALS:
• Design and Analysis of negative Feedback amplifiers using anyone of the feedback topologies.

UNIT– II OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9L, 3P

IC fabrication technology-Design of Op Amp- specifications, slew rate, and methods of improving slew
rate. Linear and Nonlinear Circuits using operational amplifiers and their analysis, Inverting and
Noninverting Amplifiers, Differentiators, Integrator, Voltage to Current converters, Log and Antilog
amplifiers.
PRACTICALS:
• Design and analysis of Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier using Op Amp

UNIT–III SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS AND POWER AMPLIFIERS 9L,12P

Barkhausen criteria for oscillator – Analysis of RC oscillators- Phase shift and Wein bridge oscillators –
LC oscillators – Colpitts, Hartley- Ring Oscillators. Multivibrator- Monostable, Astable and Bistable,
Comparator, Schmitt trigger, Power Amplifiers-Class A, Class B, class AB and class C.
PRACTICALS:
• Design and analysis of RC Phase shift oscillator
• Design and analysis of Hartley and Colpitts Oscillators using Spice Simulation
• Design and analysis of Wien Bridge Oscillator using OP-AMP - using Spice Simulation
• Design and analysis of Schmitt trigger using OPAMP
• Design and analysis of Waveform generators using OPAMP - using Spice Simulation
• Spice simulation of Class A and Class B Power Amplifiers - using Spice Simulation

UNIT– IV SPECIAL FUNCTION ICs 9L,6P

Instrumentation amplifier, astable and monostable multivibrator using Timer IC 555, ADCs -
specifications Flash type - Successive Approximation type DAC - specifications - weighted resistor type,
R-2R Ladder type, PLL-Operation of the basic PLL, application of PLL.
PRACTICALS:
• Design and analysis of Voltage Controlled Oscillator using PLL IC(4)
• Design and analysis of Astable and Monostable Multivibrators using Timer IC

84
 UNIT– V TUNED AMPLIFIERS 9L,6P
Basic principles of Tuned circuits – Inductor losses – Use of transformers –frequency analysis of Single
tuned amplifier and Synchronous tuned amplifiers & Stagger tuned amplifiers.

PRACTICALS:
• Design and analysis of single Tuned amplifier.
TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Ability to design negative feedback amplifiers and analyze stabilization techniques
2. Ability to apply and design linear and Non-Linear analog circuits using Op Amp.
3. Ability to analyze and realize signal conditioning circuits, power amplifiers and converters.
4. Ability to select ICs and design circuits for real time applications
5. Ability to analyze RC, LC oscillators and tuned amplifiers

REFERENCES:
1. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, "Micro Electronic Circuits", Oxford University Press, 7th
Edition, 2014.
2. Behzad Razavi, "Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits", Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
3. Ramakant A Gayakwad, “Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, Pearson, 4th Edition, 2015.
4. Jacob Millman and Herbert Taub, “Pulse, Digital, and Switching Waveforms: Devices and
Circuits for their Generation and Processing”, McGraw-Hill, International Student Edition, 1965.
5. Donald.A. Neamen, "Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition,
2010.
6. Millman J. and Halkias C, "Integrated Electronics", Mc Graw Hill, 2001.
7. Robert F. Coughlin, Fredrick F. Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuits”
Prentice Hall, 6th Edition, 2001.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 3 2 2 - 1 - 1 - 1
CO2 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - 1 - 1
CO3 3 2 3 2 2 1 - 1 - 1 - 1
CO4 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - 1 - 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2 - 1 - 1 - 1
Average 2.6 2.4 2.6 2.4 2 1 - 1 - 1 - 1

85
EC23C10 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNITI COMPUTING AND COMPUTERS 9

Evolution of Computers, VLSI Era, System Design methodology: Gate level, Register Level, Processor
Level, CPU Organization, Data Representation - Fixed Point Numbers, Floating Point Numbers,.

UNITII DATA PATH DESIGN 9

Fixed Point Arithmetic – Addition and Subtraction, Multiplication - Robertson algorithm, Booth‘s
algorithm, Modified booth‘s Algorithm, Division - Restoring and non- restoring division algorithm,
Combinational and Sequential ALUs, Floating Point Arithmetic.

UNIT III CONTROL DESIGN 9

Hardwired Control – GCD Processor and Multiplier control, Microprogrammed Control - Multiplier
Control Unit, CPU control unit – Basic organization, Microinstructions, Microprogram sequencing,
Nano programming.

UNIT IV MEMORY ORGANIZATION 9

Memory hierarchy technology, Memory Characteristics and performance - Inclusion, Coherence and
Locality, Virtual Memory: Address translation-TLB - Paging and Segmentation, Memory allocation and
replacement policies - Cache memory system - Mapping functions, Associative memory, Cache
read/write operations, Cache Performance issues - Cache coherence, Memory interleaving.

UNIT V SYSTEM ORGANIZATION AND PIPELINE TECHNIQUES 9

Bus Control, Bus interfacing, Data transfer, Bus arbitration, Instruction set Architectures - RISC and
CISC – Architectural Features and Instruction format, Pipeline Techniques - Instruction Pipeline,
Arithmetic pipeline, Pipeline Performance – Latency, Throughput, Superscalar processing.
TOTAL: 45PERIODS

COURSEOUTCOMES:

Attheend of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to acquire fundamental knowledge in computer architectureand organization.
CO2: Ability to design datapath for arithmetical gorithms
CO3: Ability to analyze the concepts of control unit design.
CO4: Ability to understand cache and virtual memory characteristics.
CO5: Ability to differentiate RISC and CISC architectures and implement pipeline processing.

86
 TEXTBOOKS:
1. John P. Hayes, “ComputerarchitectureandOrganisation”, TataMcGraw-Hill,
Thirdedition, 1998.
2. [Link] Hamacher, Zvonko G. Varanesic and Safat G. Zaky, “Computer
Organisation”, V edition, McGraw-Hill Inc, 1996.

REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. KaiHwang, Naresh Jotwani,"Advanced computer Architecture", Parallelism,
Scalability, Programmability, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 1993.
2. Morris Mano,“ComputerSystemArchitecture”,Prentice-HallofIndia, 2000.
3. Behrooz Paraami, “Computer Architecture, From Microprocessor to Super
computers”, Oxford University Press, Sixth impression 2010.
4. P. Pal Chaudhuri, “Computer organization and design”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall
ofIndia,2007.
5. Miles J. Murdocca and Vincent P. Heuring, “Principles of Computer
Architecture”, Prentice Hall, 2000
6. William Stallings, “Computer Organisation and Architecture, Designing for
Performance”, Pearson Education, Eighth Edition 2010.

CO-POArticulation Matrix

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
/PO
CO1 3 2

CO2 3 2 2 1

CO3 3 3 2 1

CO4 3 2 2

CO5 3 1

87
EC23C11 CONTROL SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT– I COMPONENTS OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM 7L

Terminology and Basic Structure-Feed forward and Feedback control theory Electrical and
Mechanical Transfer Function Models-Block Diagram Models-Signal flow graphs models-DC
and AC servo Systems-Synchronous -Multivariable control system

UNIT– II TIME RESPONSE WITH SYSTEM DESIGN 8L

Transient response-steady state response-Measures of performance of the standard first
order and second order system-effect on an additional zero and an additional pole-steady
error constant and system- type number-PID control-Analytical design for PD, PI, PID control
systems

UNIT–III FREQUENCY RESPONSE WITH SYSTEM ANALYSIS 12L

Closed loop frequency Response-Performance specification in frequency domain-Frequency
response of standard second order system- Bode Plot - Polar Plot- Nyquist plots-Design of
compensators using Bode plots-Cascade lead compensation-Cascade lag compensation-
Cascade lag-lead compensation.

UNIT– IV STABILITY ANALYSIS 9L

Concept of stability-Bounded - Input Bounded - Output stability-Routh stability criterion-
Relative stability-Root locus concept-Guidelines for sketching root locus-Nyquist stability
criterion.

UNIT– V CONTROL SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9L

State variable representation-Conversion of state variable models to transfer functions-
Conversion of transfer functions to state variable models-Solution of state equations-
Concepts of Controllability and Observability-Stability of linear systems-Equivalence between
transfer function and state variable representations-State variable analysis of digital control
system-Digital control design using state feedback.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Ability to comprehend the systems components and their representation using various
control system
2. Ability to compute the steady state response using various time domain parameters
for various system
3. Ability to analyze the frequency response characteristics for both open loop and
closed loop system
4. Ability to analyze the stability of various system using Routh Hurwitz Root locus
techniques
5. Ability to illustrate the state space model of various control system Ability to Compute
the transfer function of different physical systems.

88
 REFERENCES:
1. [Link],“Control System – Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012
2. [Link] and [Link], “Control System Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers, 7th Edition, 2021
3. [Link], “Modern Control Engineering”, PHI, 5th Edition, 2012.
4. [Link], “Control System Engineering”, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2013.
5. [Link], “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 10th
Edition,2017.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 1 1 3
CO2 3 3 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 1 1 3
CO5 3 3 1 1 3
Average 3 3 1 1 3

89
 PCB DESIGN USING CAD TOOLS FOR L T P C
EC23S02
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
1 0 2 2
PCB Design Flow and EDA Tools – PCB Terminologies – PCB Mounting Technologies -
Overview of PCB Design and Fabrication Standards - PCB Placement and Routing Generic
Rules - Generation of Gerber files
LIST OF PRACTICAL EXERCISES:
1. Design a single-layer PCB to create a circuit that blinks an LED at a controlled
rateusing a timer IC.
2. Design a single-layer PCB for Audio Amplifier circuits
3. Design an LDR Sensor Module using Op-Amp.
4. Design a PCB for Rectangular Microstrip Patch Antenna
5. Customized Atmega Microcontroller Board Design.
6. Design a double layer Printed Circuit Board (PCB) for Home Automation System.
7. Design a general-purpose multi-layer Printed Circuit Board (PCB) for IoT application.
8. Design a PCB for 500W converter / inverter power system.
9. Design a PCB for Micro-strip/ Band Pass and Band Stop filter.
10. Design PCB for Half wave rectifier circuit.

SOFTWARE REQUIRED:
1. Altium Designer/Proteus PCB Design Suite/ KiCAD EDA Tools/EasyEDA/Any other
equivalent /Open Source.
TOTAL:45PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
1. Design a multipage circuit schematic using active and passive components
2. Place and Interconnect the Through-Hole (TH) components and Surface Mount
Devices (SMD) in the layout by following the PCB standards
3. Design a single, double and multi-layer PCB layout & Generate the Gerber File for
PCB fabrication by calculating the trace width of the interconnect in the layout.

CO-PO Mapping:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 1

Avg 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 1

90
EC23501 ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I FUNDAMENTALS OF RADIATION 9L, 4P

Antenna parameters - Gain, efficiency, Directivity, Effective aperture, Radiation Resistance,
Bandwidth, Beam width, Radiation from oscillating dipole and half wave dipole
PRACTICALS:
• Design of half-wavelength dipole antenna and study the impedance and radiation
properties.

UNIT– II ANTENNA ARRAYS 9L, 6P

Two element array, N-element linear array, Pattern multiplication, Broadside and end fire
array, Array synthesis: Binomial array, Tschebyscheff array, planar array antennas.
PRACTICALS:
• Construction of an N element array using half-wavelength dipole antenna and study the
radiation pattern shaping (Broadside and end-fire pattern).

UNIT–III APERTURE ANTENNAS 9L, 8P

Huygens’ principle, radiation from rectangular aperture, Babinet’s principle, Radiation from
sectoral and pyramidal horns, design concepts, parabolic reflector antennas, lens antennas,
Microstrip Patch Antennas: Radiation mechanism, Design and Feeding Techniques.
PRACTICALS:
• Design of a pyramidal horn antenna.
• Design of a rectangular microstrip patch and conduct investigation on bandwidth and
radiation properties

UNIT– IV WIDEBAND AND SPECIAL ANTENNAS & ANTENNA 9L, 12P

MEASUREMENTS
Frequency Independent Antennas: Rumsey’s principle, LPDA, Helical Antennas,
Reconfigurability in Antennas, Antennas for Wearable, Automotive applications
Measurements: Network analyzer, Test Ranges, Antenna Gain, Radiation pattern and
polarization
PRACTICALS:
• Design of a planar log-periodic dipole array.
• Design of a frequency reconfigurable microstrip patch antenna and study the frequency
tuning properties
• Study and Demonstration of antenna measurements using Vector Network Analyzer
and Anechoic chamber

UNIT– V WAVE PROPAGATION 9L

Modes of propagation, Structure of atmosphere, Ground wave propagation, Tropospheric
propagation, Troposcatter propagation, Sky wave propagation – Virtual height, critical
frequency , Maximum usable frequency – Skip distance.

91
 TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have

1. Comprehend antenna parameters and the radiation mechanism of simple antennas

to complex antenna structures
2. Design antennas for given specifications and perform array synthesis.
3. Elaborate the radiation mechanism of aperture antennas
4. Acquire knowledge on the operation of antennas designed for specific applications
and the measurement procedures
5. Understand the propagation of radio waves in the atmosphere

REFERENCES:
1. John D Kraus, “Antennas for all Applications”, McGrawHill, 5thEdition,2005.
2. R.E. Collin, “Antennas and Radio wave propagation”, McGrawHill,1985.
3. Constantine. A. Balanis, "Antenna Theory Analysis and Design", Wiley student
edition, 3rd Edition, 2009.
4. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, Microwave Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, Second Edition, 2009
5. EdwardC. Jordan and Keith [Link], "Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating
Systems", Prentice Hall of India, 2006
6. [Link], "Modern Antennas",Springer Publications,2ndEdition,2007
7. [Link], "Antenna theory and Design", Wiley student edition,2010.
8. [Link], "Radio Wave Propagation for Telecommunication Applications", First Indian
Reprint,Springer Publications, 2007

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 3 2 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

CO5 2 2 2 2

Avg 2.75 2.6 3 2.75 3 2 2.6

92
EC23502 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I SIGNAL REPRESENTATION AND DETECTION 9L, 5P

Geometric representation of digital modulation signals Gram Schmidt’s Orthogonalization,
MAP and ML detection – Correlator and matched filter detec tion
PRACTICALS:
• Basis Signal generation using Gram Schmidt’s Orthogonalization

UNIT– II ERROR CONTROL CODING TECHNIQUES 9L, 5P

Channel coding theorem, Linear block codes, Hamming codes, Cyclic codes, Convolutional
codes, Viterbi decoding
PRACTICALS:
• Error control coding schemes – Linear and Cyclic codes

UNIT–III BAND PASS SIGNALING 9L, 5P

Generation and detection of BPSK,BFSK,QPSK-BER and Power spectral Density
Comparison- Structure of non-coherent receivers- generation and detection of BFSK, DPSK,
Overview of QAM,MSK
PRACTICALS:
• Modulation Schemes BPSK,BFSK,QPSK

UNIT– IV MULTIPLEXING, MULTIPLE ACCESS AND 9L, 10P

SYNCHRONIZATION
Multiplexing - FDM, TDM, Multiple Access: TDMA, FDMA, CDMA, SDMA Techniques,
Synchronization: Carrier, frame and symbol synchronization techniques.
PRACTICALS:
• Time Division Multiplexing
• Synchronization techniques

UNIT– V SPREAD SPECTRUM AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9L, 5P

Spread Spectrum - Direct Sequence and Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum Systems,
Processing gain and Jamming Margin Analysis, Applications of spread spectrum - CDMA
cellular system, GPS and WLAN.
PRACTICALS:
• Spread spectrum communication- DSSS

TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS

93
 COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Ability to understand geometric representation of signals and their detection
2. Ability to apply error control coding schemes and analyze its performance
3. Ability to understand and analyze pass band signaling schemes and its spectral and
BER characteristics
4. Ability to analyze multiplexing, multiple access and synchronization techniques
5. Ability to understand and analyze spread spectrum techniques

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Simon Haykin ,"Digital Communications", JohnWiley,2015.
2. B. Sklar, "Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,
2009.

REFERENCES:
1. P. HSU SchaumOutline Series" Analog and Digital Communications", TMH 2006
2. J.G Proakis, "Digital Communication", Tata McGraw Hill Company, 5th Edition, 2008
3. B. P. Lathi, "Modern digital and Analog Communication Systems", Oxford University
Press, 3rd Edition, 2007.
4. Theodore S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications-Principles and Practice”, 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education India.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO P1 P1 P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2

CO1 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1

CO4 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1

CO5 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1

Averag
3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1
e

94
 EC23C21 MICROPROCESSORS AND L T P C
MICROCONTROLLERS
3 0 2 4

UNIT–I 8-BIT and16-BITMICROPROCESSOR 9L,3P

8085 Architecture, Interrupts, Instruction set, Timing diagrams, 8086 Architecture- Minimum
and Maximum mode configurations, Instruction set, Addressing modes, Assembly Language
Programming, Memory and I/O interfacing.
PRACTICALS:
• Programs for 8/16-bit Arithmetic, Sorting and Searching operations in 8085 and 8086.

UNIT–II PERIPHERALSANDINTERFACING 9L,9P

Programmable Peripheral Interface (8255), Keyboard Display Controller (8279),
Programmable Timer Controller (8254), Programmable Interrupt Controller (8259), Serial
Communication Interface (8251), ADC0808 and DAC0808 Interface.
PRACTICALS:
• 7segment display with 8085 or 8086 using 8255 interface.
• Stepper and DC motor control using 8085 or 8086 microprocessor.
• Interfacing ADC, DAC with 8085 or 8086 microprocessor.

UNIT–III MICROCONTROLLER 9L

8051 – Architecture, Special Function Registers (SFRs), I/O Ports, Timers / Counters,
Interrupts, Serial communication, Instruction set, Addressing modes, Assembly
languageprogramming.

UNIT–IV MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN 9L,6P

Interfacing- matrix display, (16x2) LCD, Sensor, Actuators and Relay, Interfacing Stepper
Motor, DC Motor with Speed Control using PWM. Interfacing RTC and interfacing EEPROM
using I2Cprotocol.

PRACTICALS:
• Configuring and programming Timer and Interruptsin 8051 microcontrollers.
• Data transmission and reception using UART in 8051 microcontrollers.

UNIT– V 32- BITARMPROCESSOR 9L,12P

RISC Vs CISC Architecture, ARM Processor Architecture, ARM Core data flow model, Barrel
Shifter, ARM processor modes and families, Pipelining, ARM instructionset and its Assembly
language / Embedded C Programming.

PRACTICALS:
• Interfacing LED, LCD, Switch and 4x4 Keypad with ARM processor.
• Interfacing Sensor and Actuator with ARM processor.

95
 Configuring and Programming of Timers / Counters and Interrupts in ARM Processor.
UART and SPI Interfacing using ARM processor.
Interfacing RTC and EEPROM with 8051 or ARM processor.

TOTAL:45L+30P=75PERIODS

COURSEOUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. CO1: Abilitytounderstandthefeaturesandcomponentsof8-bitand16-bitmicroprocessors.
2. CO2: Ability to develop assembly language programme and interface peripherals
with microprocessors.
3. CO3: Ability to understand the 8051 architecture and the methodology to configure
and program peripherals.
4. CO4: Ability to design, develop and troubleshoot as imple microprocessor or
microcontroller based systems.
5. CO5: Ability to understand the ARM architecture and the methodology to
configureand program peripherals.

REFERENCES:
1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications
with 8085”, Penram International Publishingreprint, 6th Edition, 2017.
2. Douglas V. Hall, “Microprocessor and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”,
Tata McGrawHill, Revised 2nd Edition 2006,11th reprint 2015.
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinley, “The 8051
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education 2008.
12th impression 2018.
4. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontroller Architecture, programming and
system design using 8085, 8086, 8051 and 8096’’, PHI, 2007, 7th Reprint,2015.
5. Kenneth J. Ayala and DhananjayV. Gadre, “The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded systems using Assembly and C, Ist Edition, Cengage Learning,2010.
6. [Link].,“The 8051 Microcontroller, 3rd Edition, Thompson Delmar
Learning’, 2012
7. [Link],[Link], “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals’’,
TataMcGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition, 2010.
8. [Link], “The Intel Microprocessors Architecture, Programming and
Interfacing’’, Pearson Education, 2007, 2nd impression, 2010.
9. [Link], Dominic Symes, Chris Bright, ”ARM System Developer’s Guide,
Designing and Optimizing system software”, Andrew 2014 Edition, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers.
10. LylaBDas, Embedded Systems-An Integrated approach, Pearson Education India.

96
ARTICULATIONMATRIX

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
/PO

CO1 2 1 1 1 1

CO2 2 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1

CO4 2 2 2 1 1 1

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1

Avg 2.2 2 2.33 1.4 1.5 1 1 1

97
EC23503 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I NETWORK FUNDAMENTALS AND PHYSICAL LAYER 9L, 8P

Communication Network Evolution and Recent Trends, OSI reference model - layers and
duties. TCP/IP reference model – layers and duties. Physical layer - general description,
characteristics, signaling media types, topologies, examples physical layer (RS 232 C, ATM).
Interconnection devices - Repeaters, Hubs, Routers/switches and Gateways.
PRACTICALS:
1. Network Performance analysis of LAN.
2. Study of Configuring Switches

UNIT– II DATA LINK LAYER 9L, 7P

Logical link control Functions: - Framing, Flow control, Error control: CRC, LLC protocols:-
HDLC, P to P. Medium access layer: - Random access, Controlled access, Channelization,
IEEE standards: - 802.3, 802.4 and 802.5. Wireless LAN : 802.11
PRACTICALS:
1. Performance Studies of LLC Protocols
2. Performance Studies of Random MAC Protocols

UNIT– III NETWORK LAYER 9L, 7P

Overview of Internetworking, Interconnection issues, Circuit switching, packet switching,

message switching. Internet protocols; IPV4, IPV6, ARP, RARP, ICMP, VPN. Network
Routing Algorithms: - Distance vector routing, OSPF, Dijikstra‘s and Bellman Ford algorithm.
PRACTICALS:
1. Design and implement IPv4 address allocation for an organization using packet tracer.
2. Performance analysis of Routing Protocols

UNIT– IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9L, 4P

Process-to- process delivery: - TCP –services, segment format, TCP connections, UDP-flow
control and SCTP, Congestion control algorithms.
PRACTICALS:
1. Performance analysis of TCP and UDP protocol.
UNIT– V APPLICATION LAYER 9L, 4P
Application protocols: WWW, HTTP, FTP and TELNET, Network management protocol:
SNMP. Overview of security and security attacks.
PRACTICALS:
1. Performance evaluation of various cryptographic algorithm

TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS

98
 COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Ability to describe the role of layered communication network architecture and solutions
2. Ability to understand and analyze the performance of data link layer
3. Ability to understand, designand analyze the performance of network layer and Routing
protocols
4. Ability to understand and analyze the transport layer protocols
5. Ability to understand the application layer protocol and the importance of security to
networks

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Behrouz. A. Forouzan , "Data Communication and Networking", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th
Edition 2007.
2. Behrouz. A. Forouzan , " TCP /IP protocol suite", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Tanenboum, A.S, "Computer Networks", Prentice Hall Of India, 6thEdition , 2022.
2. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, “Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach”,
Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, 2017.
3. Stallings .W., "Data and Computer Communication", Prentice Hall of India, 10th
Edition, 1996
4. Keshav.S. An Engineering Approach To Computer Networking, Addision –
Wesley,1999
5. J. [Link], Telecommuication switching. Traffic and networks, Pearson Education 1st
Edition,2006.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Averag 3 3 1.6 1.2 1 1 1 1 1
e

99
UC23E01 ENGINEERING ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Learn basic concepts in entrepreneurship, develop mind-set and skills necessary to explore
entrepreneurship
2. Apply process of problem - opportunity identification and validation through human centred
approach to design thinking in building solutions as part of engineering projects
3. Analyse market types, conduct market estimation, identify customers, create customer
persona, develop the skills to create a compelling value proposition and build a Minimum
Viable Product
4. Explore business models, create business plan, conduct financial analysis and feasibility
analysis to assess the financial viability of a venture ideas & solutions built with domain
expertise
5. Prepare and present an investible pitch deck of their practice venture to attract
stakeholders

MODULE – I: ENTREPRENEURIAL MINDSET 4L,8P

Introduction to Entrepreneurship: Definition – Types of Entrepreneurs – Emerging Economies –

Developing and Understanding an Entrepreneurial Mindset – Importance of Technology
Entrepreneurship – Benefits to the Society.
Case Analysis: Study cases of successful & failed engineering entrepreneurs - Foster Creative
Thinking: Engage in a series of Problem-Identification and Problem-Solving tasks

MODULE – II: OPPORTUNITIES 4L,8P

Problems and Opportunities – Ideas and Opportunities – Identifying problems in society – Creation
of opportunities – Exploring Market Types – Estimating the Market Size, - Knowing the Customer
and Consumer - Customer Segmentation - Identifying niche markets – Customer discovery and
validation; Market research techniques, tools for validation of ideas and opportunities
Activity Session: Identify emerging sectors / potential opportunities in existing markets - Customer
Interviews: Conduct preliminary interviews with potential customers for Opportunity Validation -
Analyse feedback to refine the opportunity.

MODULE – III: PROTOTYPING & ITERATION 4L,8P

Prototyping – Importance in entrepreneurial process – Types of Prototypes - Different methods –

Tools & Techniques.
Hands-on sessions on prototyping tools (3D printing, electronics, software), Develop a prototype
based on identified opportunities; Receive feedback and iterate on the prototypes.

MODULE – IV: BUSINESS MODELS & PITCHING 4L,8P

Business Model and Types - Lean Approach - 9 block Lean Canvas Model - Riskiest Assumptions
in Business Model Design – Using Business Model Canvas as a Tool – Pitching Techniques:
Importance of pitching - Types of pitches - crafting a compelling pitch – pitch presentation skills -
using storytelling to gain investor/customer attention.

100
Activity Session: Develop a business model canvas for the prototype; present and receive
feedback from peers and mentors - Prepare and practice pitching the business ideas- Participate
in a Pitching Competition and present to a panel of judges - receive & reflect feedback

MODULE – V: ENTREPRENEURIAL ECOSYSTEM 4L,8P

Understanding the Entrepreneurial Ecosystem – Components: Angels, Venture Capitalists, Maker

Spaces, Incubators, Accelerators, Investors. Financing models – equity, debt, crowdfunding, etc,
Support from the government and corporates. Navigating Ecosystem Support: Searching &
Identifying the Right Ecosystem Partner – Leveraging the Ecosystem - Building the right
stakeholder network
Activity Session: Arrangement of Guest Speaker Sessions by successful entrepreneurs and
entrepreneurial ecosystem leaders (incubation managers; angels; etc), Visit one or two
entrepreneurial ecosystem players (Travel and visit a research park or incubator or makerspace
or interact with startup founders).

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop an Entrepreneurial Mind-set and Understand the Entrepreneurial Ecosystem
Components and Funding types
CO2: Comprehend the process of opportunity identification through design thinking, identify
market potential and customers
CO3: Generate and develop creative ideas through ideation techniques
CO4: Create prototypes to materialize design concepts and conduct testing to gather
feedback and refine prototypes to build a validated MVP
CO5: Analyse and refine business models to ensure sustainability and profitability Prepare and
deliver an investible pitch deck of their practice venture to attract stakeholders

REFERENCES:

1. Robert D. Hisrich, Michael P. Peters, Dean A. Shepherd, Sabyasachi Sinha (2020).

Entrepreneurship, McGrawHill, 11th Edition
2. Bill Aulet (2024). Disciplined Entrepreneurship: 24 Steps to a Successful Startup. John Wiley
& Sons.
3. Bill Aulet (2017). Disciplined Entrepreneurship Workbook. John Wiley & Sons.
4. Ries, E. (2011). The Lean Startup: How Today's Entrepreneurs Use Continuous Innovation
to Create Radically Successful Businesses. Crown Business
5. Blank, S. G., & Dorf, B. (2012). The Startup Owner's Manual: The Step-by-Step Guide for
Building a Great Company. K&S Ranch
6. Osterwalder, A., & Pigneur, Y. (2010). Business Model Generation: A Handbook for
Visionaries, Game Changers, and Challengers. John Wiley & Sons
7. Marc Gruber & Sharon Tal (2019). Where to Play: 3 Steps for Discovering Your Most
Valuable Market Opportunities. Pearson.

101
 EC23C14 DIGITAL VLSI DESIGN L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I MOS TRANSISTOR PRINCIPLES 9L, 10P

MOS operating modes, Pass transistors, Characteristics of CMOS inverter, Scaling principles
and fundamental limits. Propagation Delays, CMOS inverter scaling, Elmore‘s constant.
PRACTICALS:
1. CMOS inverter design and performance analysis
• Plot VTC curve for CMOS inverter and thereon plot dVout vs. dVin and determine
transition voltage and gain. Calculate VIL, VIH, NMH, NML for the inverter.
• Plot VTC for CMOS inverter with varying VDD.
• Plot VTC for CMOS inverter with varying device ratio.
• Redesign the inverter for symmetrical transient response and minimum propagation
delay to for a given load capacitance. Perform transient analysis of CMOS inverter
with no load and with load and determine tpHL, tpLH,
• Perform AC analysis of CMOS inverter with fanout 0 and fanout 1.

2. Use Layout editor

• Draw layout of a minimum size inverter using transistor from CMOS process library.
Use Metal 1 as interconnect line between inverters.
• Run DRC, LVS and RC extraction. Make sure there is no DRC error.
• Extract the netlist. Use extracted netlist and obtain tPHL tPLH for the inverter using
Spice.
• Use a specific interconnect length and connect and connect three inverters in a chain.
Extract the new netlist and obtain tPHL and tPLH of the middle inverter.
• Compare new values of delay times with corresponding values obtained in part ‘c’.

UNIT– II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9L

Static CMOS logic Design, Design techniques to improve the speed, power dissipation of
CMOS logic, Ratioedlogic, Passtransistor Logic, TransmissionCPL, DCVSL, Dynamic CMOS
logic, Domino logic, Dual Rail logic, NP CMOS logic and NORA logic, Stick diagram, Layout
diagrams, Logical Effort.

UNIT– III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9L, 10P

Static and Dynamic Latches and Registers, Timing Issues, Pipelines, Clocking strategies,
Memory architectures, 6T SRAM, 1Tand 3T DRAM.
PRACTICALS:
• Design the schematic of 3T/6T RAM Sequential logic and verify its functionality

102
UNIT– IV DESIGNING ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9L, 10P
Data path circuits, Architectures for Adders, Accumulators, Multipliers, Barrel Shifters
PRACTICALS:
• Design the schematic of Adder/Multiplier combinational circuit and verify its
functionality

UNIT– V IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGIES 9L

Full Custom and Semicustom Design, StandardCell design and cell libraries, FPGA building
block architectures, FPGA interconnect. ASIC Design flow
TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. AbilitytoanalyzeMOSdevicesandinverter
2. Abilitytodesignandanalyzecombinationallogic
3. AbilitytodesignandanalyzeSequentiallogic
4. Abilitytodesignandanalyzedatapath cells
5. AbilitytodesigndigitallogicusingFPGA
REFERENCES:
1. Jan Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated circuits: A
Design Perspective”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. N. Weste, K. Eshraghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI DESIGN”, Asystem
Perspective, 2nd Edition, Addision Wesley, 2004.
3. A. Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, “BASIC VLSIDESIGN”, Prentice Hall of India,
3rd Edition, 2007.
4. M.J. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addisson Wesley, 1997.
5. R. Jacob Baker, Harry [Link]., David E. Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and
Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2005.

Articulation matrix:
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
/PO
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1

103
EC23601 WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS L T P C
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I WIRELESS CHANNELS 9L, 8P

Electromagnetic Wave Propagation Mechanisms: Reflection, Diffraction, Scattering - Large
scale path loss models: Free Space, Two-Ray and Log Normal Shadowing - Link Budget
design – Small scale fading: Delay Spread; Coherence bandwidth, Doppler spread;
Coherence time - Fading due to delay spread – Fading due to Doppler spread – Level
Crossing Rate – Average Fade Duration, Small Scale fading Channel Model- Rayleigh and
Rician Channels
PRACTICALS:
1. Characterization of Wireless Channels (Simulation/Experiment)
2. Link budget analysis
UNIT– II CELLULAR CONCEPTS 9L
Cellular concepts: Frequency reuse, channel assignment, interference & system capacity -
hand off strategies - Trunking theory & grade of service – Coverage and capacity
improvement - Multiple Access techniques - FDMA, TDMA, CDMA – Capacity calculations–
Wireless standard: Overview of 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G & Beyond 5G.

UNIT– III SIGNALLING WAVEFORMS 9L, 6P

QPSK, Offset-QPSK, π/4-DQPSK, QAM Principle, Error performance in fading channels,

OFDM principle – Cyclic prefix, Windowing, PAPR reduction techniques: Clipping, PTS &
SLM.
PRACTICALS:
1. Performance Studies of Adaptive Modulation and Coding
2. SDR Implementation / Simulation of Multicarrier Modulation - OFDM
UNIT– IV EQUALIZATION & DIVERSITY 9L, 8P
Equalisation – Adaptive equalization, Linear equalization: Zero Forcing and LMS - Non-
Linear equalization: DFE and MLSE- Diversity: Micro and Macro diversity - Error probability
in fading channels with diversity reception: Selection Diversity, MRC and EGC - Rake
receiver.
PRACTICALS:
1. Equalization Techniques for Wireless Channels
2. Diversity Techniques for Wireless Channels

UNIT– V MIMO SYSTEM 9L, 8P

MIMO systems – array gain, spatial multiplexing, multiplexing gain and their trade-offs – SVD
Precoding – MIMO Capacity- Static channels: Channel Known at Transmitter: Water filling
Algorithm, Channel Unknown at Transmitter: Uniform Power Allocation – Fading channels:
Channel Known at Transmitter: Water-Filling Algorithm, Channel Unknown at Transmitter:
Ergodic Capacity and Capacity with Outage – STBC: Alamouti scheme.

104
 PRACTICALS:
1. Simulation / Implementation of Space Time Block Codes
2. Cellular Network Modeling of 5G systems
TOTAL: 45L + 30P = 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Ability to characterize the wireless channel & evolve system design specifications
2. Ability to design cellular systems based on resource availability & traffic demands
3. Ability to design & analyses suitable signalling schemes for fading channels
4. Ability to evaluate multipath mitigation technique for wireless channel & system
under consideration
5. Ability to apply & evaluate the multiple antenna concepts for capacity &
performance gains
REFERENCES:
1. Rappaport,T.S., “Wireless communications”, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Andreas.F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications”, John Wiley – India, 2ndEdition
2012.
3. Goldsmith, A., ‘Wireless Communications’, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
5. Upena Dalal, “Wireless Communication”, Oxford University Press, 2009
6. Van Nee, R. and Ramji Prasad, “OFDM for wireless multimediaVan Nee, R. and
Ramji Prasad, “OFDM for wireless multimedia communications”, Artech House,
2000
7. Simon Haykins & Michael Moher, “Modern Wireless Communications”, Pearson
Education, 2007.
8. Vijay. K. Garg, “Wireless Communication and Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, 2007

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

CO / PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 1

CO4 3 3 2 1 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1

Average 3 2 2 1 3 1 1

105
EC23602 MACHINE LEARNING L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT– I MACHINE LEARNING PRELIMINARIES 9L

Linear Algebra – Arithmetic of matrices, Norms, Probability theory – probability distribution,
conditional probability, Information theory, Structured Probabilistic models - Maximum
Likelihood estimation- Regression and Classification

UNIT– II DATA PRE-PROCESSING 9L

Data characteristics, Pre-processing, Multivariate analysis, Dimensionality Reduction-
Principal Component Analysis, LDA

UNIT–III SUPERVISED LEARNING 9L

Artificial neuron and its Mathematical model, Feed forward Neural Networks -
Backpropagation algorithm, Generalized Delta rule, Stochastic gradient descent algorithm,
Radial Basis Function Neural Networks, Support vector Machines – Structural Risk
Minimization - Kernel Types

UNIT– IV UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 9L

Clustering - K-means Clustering, Mixture Densities – Expectation Maximization algorithm,
Hierarchical Clustering, Spectral Clustering, Naïve Bayes, Self-organizing Maps

UNIT– V DEEP LEARNING MODELS 9L

Convolutional neural networks, Transfer Learning Models, Deep belief networks, Recurrent
neural networks, Deep Generative models
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Ability to understand the mathematical concepts of machine leaning models
2. Ability to analyze the given dataset for designing a neural network based solution.
3. Ability to develop proficiency in the back propagation algorithm for training multilayer
feedforward neural networks
4. Ability to develop clustering methods for complex data analysis
5. Ability to learn deep learning algorithms and architecture for real-world applications

REFERENCES:
1. Freeman J.A., D.M. Skapura, “Neural Networks: Algorithms, Applications and
Programming Techniques”, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mass, (1992)
2. S. Haykin, Neural Networks - A Comprehensive Foundation, Pearson Education,
India
3. Laurene Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks-Architectures, Algorithms and
Applications, Pearson 2004.
4. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa (2018), Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley India,
2018, 3rd Edition.

106
5. N. Crisristianini, J. S-TAYLOR (2000), An Introduction to Support Vector Machines
and Other Kernel- based Learning Methods, Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition.
6. Goodfellow,I., Bengio.,Y., and Courville, A., (2016), Deep Learning, The MIT Press
7. C. M. Bishop, Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Springer , 2013
8. S Sridhar, M Vijayalakshmi, “ Machine Learning”, Oxford University Press, 2021.

Articulation Matrix: (Along with Blooms level)

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
/PO
CO1 3 2 1

CO2 3 3 2 2 1

CO3 3 3 3 3 1

CO4 3 3 3 3 1

CO5 3 2 2 2 1

107
EC23U02 PERSPECTIVES OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C
2 0 2 3

MODULE I – INTRODUCTION 6

Principles & Historical perspectives, Importance and need for sustainability in engineering and
technology, impact and implications. United Nations Sustainability Development Goals (SDG), UN
summit – Rio & outcome, Sustainability and development indicators.

MODULE II – ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY 6

Climate change, Biodiversity loss, Pollution and waste management, Renewable vs. non-renewable
resources, Water and energy conservation, Sustainable agriculture and forestry. National and
international policies, Environmental regulations and compliance, Ecological Footprint Analysis

MODULE III – SOCIAL & ECONOMIC SUSTAINABILITY 9

Equity and justice, Community development, Smart cities and sustainable infrastructure, Cultural
heritage and sustainability, Ethical considerations in sustainable development.

Triple bottom line approach, Sustainable economic growth, Corporate social responsibility (CSR),
Green marketing and sustainable product design, Circular economy and waste minimization, Green
accounting and sustainability reporting.

MODULE IV – ELECTRONICS FOR SUSTINABILE DEVELOPMENT 9

Role of Electronics in Net Zero Carbon emission, Power electronics - key to zero carbon emissions,
Incinerators, Electronic Waste Management and Recycling, Green Electronics, Green Photonics,
Green Communication, Reduction of Hazards due to use of Radio waves.

MODULE V – SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 30

Suggested Practices not limited to

• Energy efficiency – how to save energy (energy efficient equipment, energy saving
behaviours).
• Chemical use and storage - the choice of chemicals being procured, the safe disposal of
leftover chemicals, the impact of chemicals on the environment and long-term health
impacts on humans.
• Green building, green building materials, green building certification and rating: green
rating for integrated habitat assessment (GRIHA), leadership in energy and
environmental design (LEED)
• Tools for Sustainability - Environmental Management System (EMS), ISO14000, life
cycle assessment (LCA)
• Ecological footprint assessment using the Global Footprint Network spreadsheet
calculator
• Role of Electronics in National/Sub national Status of Sustainable Development Goals

108
 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

REFERENCES:

1. Allen, D., & Shonnard, D. R. (2011). Sustainable engineering: Concepts, design and case
studies. Prentice Hall.

2. Munier, N. (2005). Introduction to sustainability (pp. 3558-6). Amsterdam, The Netherlands:

Springer.

3. Blackburn, W. R. (2012). The sustainability handbook: The complete management guide to

achieving social, economic and environmental responsibility. Routledge.

4. Clini, C., Musu, I., & Gullino, M. L. (2008). Sustainable development and environmental
management. Published by Springer, PO Box, 17, 3300.

5. Bennett, M., James, P., & Klinkers, L. (Eds.). (2017). Sustainable measures: Evaluation and
reporting of environmental and social performance. Routledge.

6. Seliger, G. (2012). Sustainable manufacturing for global value creation (pp. 3-8). Springer
Berlin Heidelberg.

7. Stark, R., Seliger, G., & Bonvoisin, J. (2017). Sustainable manufacturing: Challenges, solutions
and implementation perspectives. Springer Nature.

8. Davim, J. P. (Ed.). (2013). Sustainable manufacturing

109
EC23S03 RTL DESIGN AND SYNTHESIS L T P C
1 0 2 2

LIST OF PRACTICAL EXERCISES:

1. Design and synthesis of Combinational circuits and verify with Switches and LEDs.
i. Half adder, Full adder, Ripple carry adder and carry look ahead adder.
ii. Adder/subtractor, Comparator and Code converter
iii. Mux/Demux, Decoder/Encoder and Priority encoder
2. Design and synthesis of Sequential circuits and verify using internal clock / chip scope /
ILA.
i. Flip-flops, Counters and Shift registers
ii. Sequence detector using Mealy/Moore state machines.
3. Design and synthesis of Booth multiplier and Division algorithms and verify with Switches
and 7-Segment LEDs.
4. Design of 4-tap FIR Filter and verify with real time signals.
5. Design and synthesis of a digital clock and verify with internal clock, Switches and LCD.
6. Develop an SoC based block design with Hard/Soft core Processor and the existing IP
cores such as FFT/ XADC/ PLL.
7. Create a IP core for ALU with Verilog/VHDL/ HLS and develop an SoC based block
design with Hard/Soft core Processor and the created IP core.

HARDWARE/ SOFTWARE REQUIRED:

1. Language Used: VHDL/ Verilog/ System Verilog/System C

2. AMD Vivado Design suite or Equivalent
3. Intel Quartus Design software or Equivalent

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the concepts of digital circuits applied to VLSI design.
2. Implement and verify digital circuits with hardware description languages, EDA tools
and FPGA-based hardware setups
3. Simulate and synthesize the digital circuits and analyze the timing issues of both
combinational and sequential circuits.
4. Develop an SoC based design and implement IP cores based on HDL/ HLS.
5. Gain knowledge on project planning, development of FPGA based prototype

110
REFERENCES:
1. Roger Woods, John McAllister, Gaye Lightbody and Ying Yi, “FPGA-based implementation
of Signal Processing Systems”, Second Edition, A John Wiley and Sons, Ltd., 2017.
2. Pong P. Chu, “RTL Hardware Design using VHDL Coding for Efficiency, Portability, and
Scalability”, Wiley Interscience Publication, 2006.
3. Peter [Link], “The Designer’s Guide to VHDL”, Third Edition, Elsevier, 2008.
4. Samir Palinitkar, “Verilog HDL”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 1

CO3 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 1

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 1 2 1

CO5 3 2 3 1 3 1 2 1

3 2.6 2.8 1.6 3 1 1.4 1

111
 EC23702 MINI PROJECT L T P C
0 0 4 2
The students shall individually / or as group work on a specific topic approved by the
[Link] student can select any topic which is relevant to his/her specialization of the
programme. Thestudent should continue the work on the selected topic as per the formulated
methodology. At theend of the semester, after completing the work to the satisfaction of the
supervisor and reviewcommittee, a detailed report which contains clear definition of the
identified problem, detailedliterature review related to the area of work and methodology for
carrying out the work, results anddiscussion, conclusion and references should be prepared
as per the format prescribed by theUniversity and submitted to the Head of the department.
The students will be evaluated based onthereportandviva-voce examination bya panel of
examiners as per the Regulations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
1. Formulate and analyze problem.
2. Design and conduct experiments to verify
3. Develop working model
4. Analyze the results and provide solution for the identified problem
5. Prepare project report and make presentation.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
Average 2.4 2.4 2.4 1.8 1 1 1 1 1 1.4 1 1

112
EC23701 MILLIMETER WAVE AND OPTICAL L T P C
COMMUNICATION
3 0 2 4

UNIT– I MILLIMETER WAVE PROPAGATION 9L, 6P

Millimeter wave characteristics, applications and challenges, Radio wave propagation for mm
wave, Channel performance at 60 GHz – Gigabit wireless communication – Development of
millimeter wave standards-coexistence, mm wave link budget.
PRACTICALS:
1. Generation and modulation of millimeter waves.
2. mm wave communication system performance
(i) Link budget calculation
(ii) Noise figure measurements

UNIT– II mm WAVE TRANSCEIVERS AND ANTENNAS 9L, 6P

Millimeter wave design considerations, Transceiver architecture, Transceiver without mixer,
Receiver without oscillator, mmwave antennas – beam steering antennas, Spatial diversity of
MIMO arrays in mmwave communication.
PRACTICALS:
1. Performance analysis of mm wave transceiver.
2. Simulation of Antennas for mm wave applications.
UNIT–III OPTICAL FIBER CHARACTERISTICS 9L, 6P
Introduction to Optical Communication, optical fiber structure and parameters, ray and mode
theory of light propagation in optical fibers, Optical signal distortion – Attenuation, Dispersion
- Standard Single mode and multimode Fibers.
PRACTICALS:
1. Analog and digital transmission of optical waves.
2. Attenuation characteristics and Numerical aperture measurement of an optical fiber.
UNIT– IV OPTICAL TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9L, 6P
Materials for optical sources, light-emitting diodes, semiconductor laser diodes, power-
current characteristics, noise, direct and external modulation – Principles of optical detection,
spectral responsivity, PIN Detectors and APD, preamplifier types, receiver noises
PRACTICALS:
1. Characteristics of LED and PIN Diode
2. Characteristics of Laser and Avalanche photo diode (APD).
UNIT– V OPTICAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS 9L, 6P
Overview of FSO Optical Transmitters – Receivers – Subsystems – Pointing, Acquisition and
Tracking – Line of sight analysis- factors affecting FSO–selecting transmission wave
integration of FSO in Optical networks – installation of FSO systems.

PRACTICALS:
1. Analysis of light fidelity (Li-Fi) network for indoor wireless optical communication
113
 system
2. Performance analysis of free space optical network under external limiting factors.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Demonstrate understanding of propagation issues at Millimeter wave frequencies and
characterize the channel
2. Understand millimeter wave communication systems architectures and beamforming
3. Understand and analyze fiber transmission characteristics
4. Understand and compare optical transmitters and receivers
5. Understand and analyze free space optical communication systems

REFERENCES:
1. Kao-Cheng Huang, Zhaocheng Wang, “Millimeter Wave Communication Systems”
Wiley 2011.
2. Gerd Kaiser “Optical Fiber Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th
Edition, 2013.
3. Hemani Kaushal, V.K. Jain, Subrat Kar, “Free Space Optical Communication”,
Springer India, New Delhi, 2017.
4. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber-Optic Communication Systems”, John Wiley & Sons,
reprint, 3rd Edition, 2012.
5. Sergey M. Smolskiy Author, Leonid A. Belov and Victor N. Kochemasov, “Handbook
of RF, Microwave, and Millimeter-Wave Components”, Artech House Microwave
Library, 2012.
6. I. Robertson, N. Somjit and M. Chongcheawchamnan, “Microwave and Millimetre-
Wave Design for Wireless Communications”, 2016.
7. T.S. Rappaport, R.W. Heath Jr., R.C. Daniels and J.N. Murdock, “Millimeter Wave
Wireless Communications: Systems and Circuits”, 2015.
8. K.C. Huang, Z. Wang, “Millimeter Wave Communication Systems”, Wiley-IEEE Press,
2011.
9. Robert W. Heath, Robert C. Daniel, James N. Theodore S. Rappaport, Murdock,
“Millimeter Wave Wireless Communication”, Prentice Hall, 2014.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 1 1
Avera 3 2.4 1.8 1.6 2 1 1
ge

114
 EC23703 SUMMER INTERNSHIP L T P C
0 0 0 1
The students individually undergo training in reputed firms/ research institutes / laboratories
for thespecified duration. After the completion of training, a detailed report should be
submitted within ten days from the commencement of next semester. The students will be
evaluatedas per the Regulations
No of weeks: 2
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. System-level design processes, verification and validation techniques, manufacturing
and production processes in the firm or research facilities in the laboratory / research
institute
2. Analysisof industrial/research problems and their solutions
3. Development of solutions to the problems
4. Documentation of system specifications, design methodologies, process parameters,
testing parameters and results
5. Preparing of technical report and presentation

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
Average 1.8 2.4 2.4 1.8 1 1 1 1 1 1.4 1 1

115
EC23U01 STANDARDS (Electronics and Communication Engineering) L T P C
1 0 0 1

MODULE I – OVERVIEW OF STANDARDS 6

Basic concepts of standardization; Purpose of Standardization, marking and certification of articles

and processes; Importance of standards to industry, policy makers, trade, sustainability and
innovation. Objectives, roles and functions of BIS, Bureau of Indian Standards Act, ISO/IEC
Directives; WTO Good Practices for Standardization. Important Indian and International Standards.

MODULE II – NATIONAL, INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS & TECHNICAL

REGULATIONS IN INDIA 9

- Objectives, Roles and Functions of BIS, Bureau of Indian Standards Act

- Important Indian and International Standards

- ISO/IEC, IAF and ILAC – Their Role in Conformity Assessment

- Product Standards, Codes of Practice, Testing Standards, National Codes on Electricity

and Lighting Management Systems Standards – Difference and industry preferences

- Marking and Certification of articles - ISI Mark and management systems

- Regulations on Compulsory Registration Scheme for Electronics & IT Goods - Electronics

and Information Technology Goods (Requirement of Compulsory Registration) Order, 2021

- BIS Conformity Assessment Regulation 2018

116
 EC23801 PROJECT WORK / INTERNSHIP CUM PROJECT L T P C
WORK
0 0 16 8
COURSEOBJECTIVES:
Totrain thestudentsin
• Identifying problem and developing the structured methodology to solve the identified
problem in the industry or research problem at research Institution or college.
• Conducting experiments, analyze and discuss the test results, and make conclusions.
• Preparing project reports and presentation

The students shall individually / or as group work on a specific topic approved by the
[Link] student can select any topic which is relevant to his/her specialization of the
programme. Thestudent should continue the work on the selected topic as per the formulated
methodology. At theend of the semester, after completing the work to the satisfaction of the
supervisor and reviewcommittee, a detailed report which contains clear definition of the
identified problem, detailedliterature review related to the area of work and methodology for
carrying out the work, results anddiscussion, conclusion and references should be prepared
as per the format prescribed by theUniversity and submitted to the Head of the department.
The students will be evaluated based onthereportandviva-voceexamination bya
panelofexaminersas pertheRegulations.

TOTAL : 240 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
1. Formulate and analyze problem / create a new product/ process.
2. Design and conduct experiments to verify
3. Develop working/simulation model
4. Analyze the results and provide solution for the identified problem
5. Prepare project report and make presentation.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
Average 2.6 2.4 2.4 1.8 1 1 1 1 1 1.4 1 1

117
EC23C23 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I DISRETE-TIME RANDOM SIGNALS 9

Discreter and omprocess – Ensemble averages, Stationary and ergodic processes,

Autocorrelation and Autocovarian ceproperties and matrices, Whitenoise, Power Spectral
Density, Spectral Factorization, Innovations Representation and Process, Filtering random
processes, ARMA, AR and MA processes.

UNIT II SPECTRUM ESTIMATION 9

Bias and Consistency, Periodogram, Modified periodogram, Blackman-Tukey method, Welch

method, Parametric methods of spectral estimation, Levinson-Durbin recursion.

UNIT III LINEAR ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION 9

Forward and Backward linear prediction, Filtering – FIR Wienerfilter-Filtering and linear
prediction, non-causal and causal IIR Wiener filters.

UNIT IV ADAPTIVE FILTERS 9

Principles of adaptive filter – FIR adaptive filter – Newton‘s Steepest descent algorithm – LMS
algorithm–Adaptive noise cancellation, Adaptive equalizer,Adaptive echo cancellers.

UNIT V MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING 9

Introduction to Multirate signal processing – Decimation - Interpolation-Polyphase

Decomposition of FIR filter – Multistage implementation of sampling rate conversion -
Applications of Multirate signal processing.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able

CO1: To analyze statistical characteristics of random signals

CO2: To identify appropriate spectrum estimation method based on type of random

signal

CO3: To design optimum filters for processing random signal

CO4: To design filters for quasi stationary signals

CO5: To analyze and design systems with varying samplerate

118
TEXT BOOKS:.
1. Monson H, Hayes, "Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling", John Wiley and
SonsInc., New York, Indian Reprint, 2008.
2. [Link], DimitrisG. Manolakis, "Digital Signal Processing", Pearson, 4th Edition,
2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. [Link],"Optimum Signal Processing, AnIntroduction", McGrawHill,

2ndEdition 2007
2. [Link],"Random Signal Processing", Prentice Hall,1995.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
Average 3 3 3 2 1.6 1.4 1 1 1

119
EC23C24 DIGITAL SPEECH PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I SPEECH FUNDAMENTALS 10

Articulatory Phonetics–Production and Classification of Speech Sounds; Acoustic Phonetics –

Acoustics of speech production; Review of Digital Signal Processing concepts; Short-Time
Fourier Transform, Filter-Bank and LPC Methods.

UNIT II SPEECH ANALYSIS 10

Feature Extraction and Pattern Comparison Techniques: Speech distortion measures

mathematical and perceptual–Log–Spectral Distance, Cepstral Distances, Weighted Cepstral
Distances and Filtering, Likelihood Distortions, Spectral Distortion using a Warped Frequency
Scale, LPC, PLP and MFCC Coefficients, Time Alignment and Normalization –Dynamic Time
Warping, Multiple Time–Alignment Paths.

UNIT III SPEECH MODELING 8

Hidden Markov Models: Markov Processes, HMMs – Evaluation, Optimal State Sequence –
Viterbi Search, Baum-Welch Parameter Re-estimation, Implementation issues.

UNIT IV SPEECH RECOGNITION 8

Large Vocabulary Continuous Speech Recognition: Architecture of a large vocabulary

continuous speech recognition system – acoustics and language models – n-grams, context
dependent subword units; Applications.

UNIT V SPEECH SYNTHESIS 9

Text-to-Speech Synthesis: Concatenative and waveform synthesis methods, sub-word units for
TTS, intelligibility and naturalness–role of prosody, Applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to use speech related parameters
CO2: Ability to extract significant features from speech using several distortion measures

CO3: Ability to develop models for speech signals

CO4: Ability to develop speech recognition algorithms

CO5: Ability to develop speech synthesis system.

120
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Lawrence Rabiner and Biing-Hwang Juang,"Fundamentals of Speech

Recognition", Pearson Education, 2003.

2. Daniel Jurafsky and James H Martin, "Speech and Language Processing–An

Introduction to Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics, and
Speech Recognition", Pearson Education, 3rd Edition,2018.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Frederick Jelinek, "Statistical Methods of Speech Recognition", MIT Press,

Reprint2001

2. Steven [Link], "The Scientist and Engineer‘s Guide to Digital Signal Processing",
California Technical Publishing,1997.

3. Thomas FQuatieri,"Discrete-Time Speech Signal Processing Principles and

Practice", Pearson Education,2004

4. Claudio Becchetti and Lucio Prina Ricotti,"Speech Recognition", John Wiley and
Sons,1999.

5. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, "Speech and Audio Signal Processing and
Perception of Speech and Music", Wiley

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2
CO3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3
Average 2.5 2.5 2.5 1 1 1 2.5

121
EC23C33 ROBOTICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I SCOPE OF ROBOTS 9

The scope of industrial Robots - Definition of an industrial robot - Need for industrial robots –
Economic and Social Issues- applications.

UNIT II ROBOT COMPONENTS 9

Fundamentals of Robot Technology- Automation and Robotics- Robot anatomy-Work volume-

Precision of movement- End effectors- Sensors.

UNIT III ROBOT PROGRAMMING 9

Robot Programming - Methods - interlocks textual languages. Characteristics of Robot level

languages, characteristic of task level languages.

UNIT IV ROBOT WORK CELL 9

Robot Cell Design and Control- Remote Center compliance-Safety in Robotics.

UNIT V FUTURE TRENDS 14 9

Telepresence robot, Autonomous mobile robots, Walker Robots, Solar-ball Robot, Underwater
bots, Aerobots, Advanced robotics in Space –Specific features of space robotics systems-long-
term technical developments, Next generation robots.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of robotics in the
present contemporary world

CO2: Ability to know about robotic components.

CO3: Ability to develop robot programming

CO4: Ability to design robot cell with safety measures.

CO5: Ability to understand future trends in robot technology.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Barry Leatham-Jones, "Elements of industrial Robotics", Pitman Publishing,1987.

2. [Link],"IntroductoryRobotics",Prentice Hall,1992.

122
 3. John Iovine,"Robots, Android and Animatronics", 2ndEdition, McGraw-Hill,2012.

4. [Link], "Designing Autonomous Mobile Robots-Inside the mind of an

Intelligent Machine", Newnes Publication,2004.

5. Robert [Link], "Fundamentals of Robotics-Analysis and Control", Pearson

Education,2006

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger [Link] Nicholas [Link], "Industrial

Robotics Technology, Programming and Applications", McGraw Hill Book Company,
1986.

2. [Link] R.C. and LeeC.S.G., "Robotics Control Sensing, Vision and

Intelligence", McGraw Hill, International Editions,1987.

3. Bernard Hodges and Paul Hallam, "Industrial Robotics", British Library Cataloging in
Publication,1990.

4. Deb, S.R., "Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation", Tata McGraw Hill, 1994.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Average 2 1.6 1.6 1.6 1 1 1 1 1 1

123
EC23C15 DSP ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING L T P C

2 0 2 3

UNIT I ARCHITECTURES FOR PROGRAMMABLE DSP 6

PROCESSORS
Basic Architectural features, DSP Computational buildingblocks, Bus architecture and memory,
Data addressing capabilities, Address generation Unit, Programmability and program execution,
Speed issues, Features for external interfacing.

UNIT II TMS320C5X PROGRAMMABLE DSP PROCESSOR 6L, 6P

Architecture of TMS320C54 xxDSP processors, Addressing modes–Assembly language

Instructions - Memory space, interrupts, and pipeline operation of TMS320C54xx DSP
Processor, On-Chip peripherals, Block Diagram of TMS320C54xx DSP starter kit.

PRACTICALS:
[Link] time waveform generation
2. Programming examples C and Assembly language
UNIT III TMS320C6XPROGRAMMABLEDSP PROCESSOR 6L, 8P

Commercial TI DSP processors, Architecture of TMS320C6x DSP Processor, Linear and

Circular addressing modes, TMS320C6x Instruction Set, Assembler directives, Linear Assembly,
Interrupts, Multichannel buffered serial ports, Block diagram of TMS320C67xx DSP Starter Kit
and Support Tools.

PRACTICALS:
[Link] examples using C and Linear Assembly
2. Implementationof movingaveragefilter
3. FIRimplementationwitha Pseudorandomnoisesequenceasinputtoafilter
UNIT IV IMPLEMENTATION OFDSPALGORITHMS 6, 6P

DSP Development system, On-chip, and On-board peripherals of C54xx and C67xx DSP
development boards, Code Composer Studio (CCS) and support files, Implementation of
Conventional FIR, IIR, and Adaptive filters in TMS320C54xx/ TMS320C67xx DSP processors
for real-time DSP applications, Implementation of FFT algorithm for frequency analysis in real-
time.

PRACTICALS:
1. Fixed point implementation of IIR filter
2. FFTof Real-Time input signal

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF DSP PROCESSORS 6L, 10P

Voice scrambling using filtering and modulation, Voice detection and reverse playback, Audio
effects, Graphic Equalizer, Adaptive noise cancellation, DTMF signal detection, Speech thesis
using LPC, Automatic speaker recognition

124
PRACTICALS:
Case study – Realization of applications
THEORY : 30 PERIODS

HARDWARE & SOFTWARE SUPPORT TOOLS:

• TMS320C54xx/ TMS320C67xx DSP Development board

• Code Composer Studio(CCS)
• Function Generator and Digital Storage Oscilloscope
• Microphone and speaker
PRACTICAL: 30 PERIODS

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Understand the architectural features o fDSP Processors.
CO2: Comprehend the organization of TMS320C54xxDSP processors
CO3: Build solutions using TMS320C6x DSP Processor
CO4: Implement DSP Algorithms
CO5: Study the applications of DSP Processors.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, Digital Signal Processing – Implementations using DSP
Microprocessors with Examples from TMS320C54xx, Cengage Learning India Private
Limited, Delhi 2012
2. Rulph Chassaing and Donald Reay, Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the
TMS320C6713 and TMS320C6416 DSK, Second Edition, Wiley India (P) Ltd, New Delhi,
2008

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B. Venkataramani and [Link], “Digital Signal Processors – Architecture,

Programming and Applications”,TataMcGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited. New
Delhi, 2003.

2. TMS320C5416/6713DSKusermanualat[Link]

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

125
 CO1 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 2
Average 3 2.8 2.2 2.2 2 1 1 2

EC23001 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I PIPELINING AND PARALLEL PROCESSING 9

Introduction to DSP Systems, Typical DSP algorithms, Data flow graph representations, Loop
bound and Iteration bound, Longest Path Matrix algorithm; Pipelining and Parallel processing of
FIR digital filters, Pipelining and Parallel processing for low power.

UNIT II RETIMING AND ALGORITHMIC STRENGTH REDUCTION 9

Retiming - definitions and properties; Unfolding – an algorithm for Unfolding, properties of

unfolding, sample period reduction and parallel processing application; Algorithmic strength
reduction in filters and transforms – 2-parallel FIR filter, 2-parallel fast FIR filter, DCT algorithm
architecture transformation, Odd-Even Merge-Sort architecture, Parallel Rank-Order filters.

UNIT III FAST CONVOLUTION AND COMBINED PIPELINING AND 9

PARALLEL PROCESSING OF IIR FILTERS

Fast convolution – Cook-Toom algorithm, Modified Cook-Took algorithm; Look- Ahead pipelining
in first- order IIR filters, Look- Ahead pipelining with power-of-two decomposition, parallel
processing of IIR filters, combined pipelining and parallel processing of IIR filters.

UNIT IV BIT-LEVEL ARITHMETIC ARCHITECTURES 9

Bit-Level Arithmetic Architectures- parallel multipliers with sign extension, 4x 4 bit Baugh-Wooley
carry-save multiplication tabular form and implementation, CSD representation, CSD multiplication
using Horner‘s rule for precision improvement, Distributed Arithmetic.

UNIT V NUMERICAL STRENGTH REDUCTION AND WAVE PIPELINING 9

Numerical Strength Reduction – subexpression elimination, Multiple Constant Multiplications,

Synchronous pipelining and Clocking styles, Clock skew in edge-triggered single-phase clocking,
Wave pipelining.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

126
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
CO1: Ability to determine the parameters influencing the efficiency of DSP architectures and apply
pipelining and parallel processing techniques to alter FIR structures for efficiency.
CO2: Ability to analyze and modify the design equations leading to efficient DSP architectures

CO3: Ability to speed up convolution process and develop fast and area efficient IIR structures.

CO4: Ability to develop fast and area efficient multiplier architectures.

CO5:Ability to reduce multiplications and build fast hardware for synchronous digital systems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Keshab K. Parhi, “VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems”, Design and implementation Wiley,
Inter Science, Reprint 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Roger Woods, John MCAllister, Gaye Light body and Ying Yi, “FPGA-based implementation of
Signal Processing systems”, Wiley 2nd edition, 2011.
2. Shoab Ahmed Khan, “Digital design of signal processing systems- A Practical Approach”, A John
Wiley and Sons, Ltd., publication, 2011.
3. Mohammed Ismail and Terri Fiez, “Analog VLSI Signal and Information Processing” ,McGraw-Hill,
1994
4. S.Y. Kung, H.J. White House, T. Kailath, “VLSI and Modern Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall,
1985
5. Jose E. France, YannisT sividis, “Design of Analog - Digital VLSI Circuits for Telecommunication
and Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall, 1994

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1
Average 3 2 1 1 1 1

127
EC23C19 DIGITAL CONTROL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 6

Review of frequency and time response analysis and specifications of control systems, need for
controllers, continuous time compensations, continuous time PI, PD, PID controllers.

UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING IN DIGITAL CONTROL 12

Sampling, time and frequency domain descriptions, aliasing, hold operations, mathematical
model of sample and hold, zero and first order hold, factors limiting the choice of sample rate,
reconstruction, Difference equation description, Z-transform method of description, pulse
transfer function, time and frequency response of discrete time control systems.

UNIT III DESIGN OF DIGITAL CONTROL ALGORITHMS 9

Review of principle of compensator design, Z-plane specifications, digital compensator design

using frequency response plots, discrete integrator, discrete differentiator, development of digital
PID controller, transfer function, design in Z-plane.

UNIT IV STATE VARIABLE TECHNIQUES 9

Discrete State Variable concepts, Characteristic equation, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors,

Jordan canonical models, Phase Variable companionforms.

UNIT V CONTROLLABILITY, OBSERVABILITY AND STABILITY 9

Definitions and Theorems of Controll ability and Observability, Relationships between

Controllability, Observability and Transfer Functions, Jury, Routh, Lyapunov stability analysis,
Principles of state and output feedback.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to analyze the characteristics of continuous time systems and determine
their impacts on the design of digital control systems.
CO2: Ability to comprehend the basics of digital signal processing techniques in the
applications of digital control systems.
CO3: Ability to illustrate the design of various digital control algorithms and its
implementation issues in digital control systems.
CO4: Ability to analyze the discrete state variable concepts and its control system
specifications

128
 CO5: Ability to merge the concepts of controllability, observability and stability in a
design of modern digital control systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. BenjaminC. Kuo, Digital Control Systems, OXFORD University Press, 2ndEdition,

2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. [Link], "Digital Control and State Variable Methods", TataMcGrawHill,
2ndEdition, 2007.

2. [Link],"Discrete-Time Control Systems", PHI, 2nd Edition, 2007.

3. Gene. [Link], [Link], [Link], "Digital Control of Dynamic Systems",

Addison Wesley,3rd Edition,2000.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1
Average 3 2.4 3 1 1 1

129
EC23C25 MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION AND NETWORKS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I MULTIMEDIA COMPONENTS 9

Introduction - Multimedia skills- Multimedia components and their characteristics - Text, sound,
images, graphics, animation, video, hardware.

UNIT II AUDIO AND VIDEOCOMPRESSION 9

Audio compression – DPCM – Adaptive DPCM – adaptive predictive coding-linear Predictive

coding code excited LPC - perpetual coding – Video compression principles-H.261, H.263,
MPEG1, 2,4.

UNIT III TEXTAND IMAGE COMPRESSION 9

Compression principles-source encoders and destination encoders-lossless and lossy

compression-entropy encoding –source encoding- text compression –static Huffman coding
dynamic Huffman coding–arithmetic coding–Lempel Ziv-Welsh Compression-image
compression

UNIT IV VoIP TECHNOLOGY 9

Basics of IP transport, VoIP challenges, H.323/ SIP –Network Architecture, Protocols, Call
establishment and release,VoIP and SS7,Quality of Service–CODEC Methods-VOIP
applicability.

UNIT V MULTIMEDIANETWORKING 9

Multimedia networking- Applications-streamed stored and audio-making – Best Effort service

protocols for real time interactive Applications-distributing multimedia-beyond best effort
service secluding and policing Mechanisms-integrated services-differentiated Services-RSVP.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to characterize the features of multimedia components
CO2: Abilityto develop audio andvideoprocessing systems
CO3: Ability to develop compression algorithms for processing text and images
CO4: Ability to tackle network issues in the transmission of text,audio and video signals
CO5: Understand the different multimedia networking and their applications.
TEXT BOOKS:

1. FredHalshall,"Multimedia Communication – Applications , Networks, Protocols and

Standards", Pearson education, 2007

130
2. TayVaughan,"Multideai:Making It Work", TMH, 8thEdition,2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kuroseand [Link], "Computer Networking A Top Down Approach", Pearson

education, 3rdEdition, 2005.

2. Marcus Goncalves―Voiceover IP Networks, McGrawHill,

3. [Link],ZS Bojkovic, DAMilovanovic,"Multimedia Communication

Systems:Techniques, Standards,and Networks",Pearson Education,2007

4. [Link],[Link],"Multimedia Computing, Communications and

Applications", Pearson Education, 1st Edition,1995.

5. RanjanParekh,"PrinciplesofMultimedia",TMH,2006.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
Average 3 2.4 2.2 2 1 1 1.6

131
EC23002 CMOS ANALOG IC DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I BASIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9

NMOS and PMOS device operation in saturation and sub-threshold regions, device
transconductance, output impedance and equivalent circuit. Introduction to Device models
for simulation. CS, CG, and source follower circuits. gm/Id design methodology.

UNIT II MULTIPLE TRANSISTOR STAGES 9

Cascode circuits, folded cascode circuits, Differential amplifier circuits, quantitative

analysis of differential pair, CMRR, Differential pair with MOS loads, Gilbert Cell, Current
Mirrors.

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND NOISE 9

CHARACTERISTICS

Miller effect and association of poles with nodes, Frequency response of CS stage, Zero
value time constant method, short circuit time constant method to analyze dominant and
non dominant poles, Characteristics of noise – thermal and flicker noise. Noise in CS, CG,
Cascode and source follower stages.

UNIT IV OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Two stage op-amps, gain boosting, common mode feedback, input range limitation, slew
rate, power supply rejection, noise in op-amps.

UNIT V FEEDBACK AND STABILITY 9

Properties of feedback circuits, topologies, effect of loading and noise in feedback circuits.
Stability in multipole systems, phase margin, frequency compensation in two stage op-
amps, other compensation techniques.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Design DC biasing circuit of various MOSFET amplifier configurations

CO2: Analyze small signal modeling of various MOS circuits

CO3: Analyze noise modeling associated with various MOS circuits

CO4: Analyze op-amp circuits and its stability conditions

CO5: Design negative feedback amplifier circuits

132
TEXT BOOKS:

1.
[Link], “Design of CMOS Analog Integrated Circuits", Tata McGraw Hill,
2nd Edition, 2017.

2. [Link], Hurst and Meyer "Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated

Circuits", John Wiley, 5th Edition, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Willy Sansen , “Analog Design Essentials:", Springer, 2006

2. NPTEL Course: [Link]

Phillip E. Allen, Douglas [Link], “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Third

3.
edition, Oxford University Press, 2013

Kenneth William Martin, David Johns, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, Wiley
4.
India, 2nd Edition 2013.

Jacob Baker “CMOS: Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation”, Wiley IEEE Press,
5.
4th Edition, 2019.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 2
Average 3 2.8 2.6 2.4 2 1 1 2

133
EC23003 VLSI TESTING AND DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I TEST REQUIREMENTS AND METRICS 9

Validation platforms- SOC design methodology, IP components, Integration, Clocking, I/Os and
interfaces, Device modes, Logic, memories, analog, I/Os, power management; Test
requirements- Test handoffs, Testers where DUT and DFT fit into design / framework; Test-
ATPG, DFT, BIST, COF, TTR; Test cost metrics and test economics; Logic fault models- SAF,
TDF, PDF, Iddq, St-BDG, Dy-BDG, SDD; Basics of test generation and fault simulation-
Combinational circuits, Sequential; Specific algorithmic approaches, CAD framework,
Optimizations.

UNIT II SCAN DESIGN AND BIST 9

Scan Design- Scan design requirements, Types of scan and control mechanisms, Test pattern
construction for scan, Managing scan in IPs and SOCs, Scan design optimizations, Partitioning,
Clocking requirements for scan and delay fault testing, Speed of operation; BIST – Framework,
Controller configurations, FSMs, LFSRs, STUMPS architecture, Scan compression and bounds,
Test per cycle, Test per scan, Self-testing and self-checking circuits, Online test.

UNIT III MEMORY TEST AND TEST INTERFACES 9

Memory Test -Memory fault models, Functional architecture as applicable to test, Test of
memories, Test of logic around memories, BIST controller configuration, Test of logic around
memories, DFT and architecture enhancements, Algorithmic optimizations; Test Interfaces-Test
control requirements, Test interfaces - 1500, JTAG, Hierarchical, serial control, Module / IP test,
SOC test, Board test, System test, Boundary scan.

UNIT IV DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS AND POWER MANAGEMENT 9

DURING TEST
Design Considerations- Design considerations, Physical design congestion, Partitioning, Clocks,
Test modes, Pins, Test scheduling, Embedded test, Architecture improvements, Test in the
presence of security; Power management during test- Methods for low power test, ATPG
methods, DFT methods, Scan methods, Low power compression, Test of power management,
Implications of power excursions, Optimizations.

UNIT V ANALOG TEST 9

Test requirements. DFT methods. BIST methods. Test versus measurement. Defect tests versus
performance tests. Tests for specific modules - PLL, I/Os, ADC, DAC, SerDes, etc. RF test
requirements.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

134
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Understand logic and fault simulation requirements and testability measures.

CO2: Understand the Design for Testability.

CO3: Develop interfacing and memory testing.

CO4: Perform testing with power management techniques.

CO5: Carry-out fault Detection in analog circuits

TEXT BOOKS:

1.
Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits,
Vishwani Agrawal and Michael Bushnell, Springer, 2002.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2
Average 3 3 2.6 1.8 1.8 1 1 2

135
EC23C12 DATACONVERTERS L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9

Quantization noise, anti aliasing filters, gain and offset errors, definitions of INL and DNL, SNR,
SFDR, ENOB of ADC/DACs, finite duration pulse aperture effects, transistor matching,
Bandgapreferencedesign.

UNIT II D/ACONVERTER DESIGN, SAMPLE AND HOLDCIRCUITS 9

Current Steering DACs, current cell design issues. Properties of MOS Switches, charge
injection, boot strapping, sampling jitter, thermal noise, Quantization noise and non
linearityeffects.

UNIT III COMPARATOR DESIGN 9

Comparator architectures, metastability and yield, Clock feed through effects, switched
capacitor amplifiers and offset cancellation.

UNIT IV ADC/DACARCHITECTURES 9

SAR, Flash, Pipeline and time interleaved ADC topologies and their CMOS realizations issues.
Error correction procedures for ADCs.

UNIT V OVER SAMPLINGCONVERTERS 9

Delta sigma modulators, alternative modulator architectures, quantization and noise shaping,
decimation filtering, implementation of Delta sigma modulators, delta sigma DACs.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: To carry out the design of the various building blocks used in mixed signal (A/D and
D/Aconverters) CMOS IC Design. These include sample and hold circuits,
comparators andswitched capacitor amplifiers,
CO2: To carry out simple designs of flash ADCs, pipeline ADCs, Current Steering
DACs and sigma delta converters.

CO3: To carry out the paper design based on hand calculations for the above important
functional blocks and enable the student to carry out circuit simulations and layout
design.

CO4: To characterize the performance parameters of any industry standard flash ADCs,
pipeline ADCs, Current Steering DACs and sigma delta converters.

CO5: To pursue design and/ or research carriers in the broad field of electronics and
communication.

136
 TEXT BOOKS:
1. Marcel Pelgrom, "Analog to Digital Conversion", Springer Verlag, 2nd
Edition, 2013.

2. Shanthi Pavan, Richard Schreier, Gabor C. Temes, “Understanding Delta-

Sigma Data Converters”, Willey–IEEE Press,2nd Edition,2017.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. FrancoMalobreti"DataConverters", SpringerVerlag, 2007

2. VLSI Data Conversion Circuits EE658 recorded lectures available

at[Link]

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 2
Average 3 2.8 2.6 2.6 2 1 1 2

137
EC23004 RF MICROELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I RF BASICS 9

Discrete and CMOS realization passive components for RF, Impedance Matching, Distortion,
IIP3, Dynamic range, Noise sources, Noise Figure, Friis Formula for cascaded blocks.
Heterodyne and Homodyne architectures.

UNIT II CMOS LNAs AND MIXERS 9

Noise Figure of and impedance matching issues CS, CG and differential LNAs, Design
examples, Passive mixers and conversion loss, Active mixers, Gilbert cells, linearity and Noise
Figure of mixers

UNIT III OSCILLATORS 9

Feedback, one port view of oscillators, cross coupled oscillators, ring oscillator, Voltage
controlled oscillator (VCO) LC VCO, Phase noise. Design of VCO, Quadrature oscillators

UNIT IV PLLs AND SYNTHESIZERS 9

Phase Detectors, charge pumps and their transfer functions, Non idealities, Synthesizers based
on first, second and third order PLLs and stability issues,Introduction to integer and fractional N
synthesizers.

UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS 9

Class A, B, C, D, E, F and AB power amplifiers, Linearization and impedance matching issues

of power amplifiers.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Develop and analyze RF transceivers

CO2: Design and analyze LNAs and mixers for Transceivers

CO3: Design and develop RF oscillators

CO4: DesignanddevelopPLLs and synthesizers

CO5: Design poweramplifiers.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link],"RFMicroelectronics",PearsonEducation,2ndEdition,2012.

2. Hooman Darabi,” Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits and Systems”, Cambridge

University Press, Cambridge, 2020
138
ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1
Average 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1

139
EC23005 VLSI PHYSICAL DESIGN AUTOMATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I VLSIDESIGNCYCLE 9

VLSI Design problem – design domains, methods and technologies - VLSI Design automation tools
- Algorithmic Graph Theory and Computational Complexity –Tractable and Intractable problems
–general purpose methods for combinatorial optimization

UNIT II DESIGN ALGORITHMS 9

Design rules– symbolic layout- layout compaction- problem formulation-algorithms for constraint
graph compaction – placement and partitioning-Circuit representation-Placement algorithms–
partitioning algorithms.

UNIT III FLOOR PLANNING AND ROUTING 9

Floor planning concepts-shape functions and floor plan sizing– Routing -Types of local routing
problems – Area routing –channel routing –global routing –algorithms for global routing.

UNIT IV VLSI SIMULATION 9

Simulation-Gate-level modeling and simulation-Switch-level modeling and simulation-

Combinational Logic Synthesis-Binary Decision Diagrams –Two Level Logic Synthesis.

UNIT V SYNTHESIS AND SCHEDULING 9

Hardware models for high level synthesis - High level Synthesis - Internal representation -
Allocation assignment and scheduling- Simple scheduling algorithms- Assignment problem –
High level transformations.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world.

CO2: Apply VLSI design methodologies and design rules for digital circuits.

CO3: Use floor planning and rooting concepts for digital circuits.

CO4: Apply Gate level and Switch level modelling and Simulation

140
 CO5: Apply high level logic synthesis and scheduling.

TEXT BOOKS:

1.
[Link],"Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation",John Wiley&Sons,2002.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.
[Link],"Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation",Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2002.

2. Giovanni De Micheli, “Synthesis and optimization of digital circuits”, McGraw Hill,

1994.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
Average 3 2.8 2.6 2.6 2.33 1 1 3 3

141
EC23006 OPTOELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR THEORY 9

Basic quantum mechanics, semiconductor statistics, carrier transport, optical processes,

andjunction theory, Properties of simple and compound semiconductors, Optical absorption,
Optical recombination, Recombination and carrier lifetime.

UNIT II LIGHT EMITTING DIODES 9

Energy Bands. Direct and Indirect Bandgap Semiconductors: E-k Diagrams. pn Junction
Principles. The pn Junction Band Diagram. Light Emitting Diodes. LED Materials.
Heterojunction High Intensity LEDs. LED Characteristics. LEDs for Optical Fiber
Communications, White LED for display and lighting applications.

UNIT III STIMULATED EMISSION DEVICES 9

Stimulated Emission and Photon Amplification. Stimulated Emission Rate and Einstein
Coefficients. Optical Fiber Amplifiers. LASER Oscillation Conditions. Principle of the Laser
Diode. Heterostructure Laser Diodes. Rate Equation- Characteristics. Light Emitters for Optical
FiberCommunications. Quantum Well and Quantum dot Devices. Vertical Cavity Surface
Emitting Lasers(VCSELs).Optical Laser Amplifiers.

UNIT IV PHOTOVOLTAICS AND DISPLAY DEVICES 9

Photovoltaic Device Principles. pn Junction Photovoltaic I-V Characteristics. Solar Cells

Materials, Devices and Efficiencies. Liquid crystal displays, Reflective and Transreflective
types, TFT displays,Plasma displays,LED TV.

UNIT V POLARIZATION AND MODULATION OF LIGHT 9

Polarization. Light Propagation in an Anisotropic Medium: Birefringence. Electro-Optic

Effects..Acousto-Optic [Link]-Optic [Link] Optical Modulators
Electro-absorption modulators. Non-Linear Optics and Second HarmonicGeneration.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Understand various kinds of semiconductor materials used in optoelectronics

142
 CO2: Understand the mechanisms of light absorption and emission in p-n junctions
CO3: Use photodiodes,LEDs,and laserdiodesforvarious applications.
CO4: Understand the mechanism of Photovoltaic devices and display devices.
CO5: Understand the various polarization and modulation of light signals.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. [Link],"Optoelectronics and Photonics: Principles and Practices",Pearson,2013.

2. Michael Parker,"Physics of optoelectronics",CRC press,2018.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. [Link], "Nano photonics",JohnWiley&Sons,2004.

2. Deng-KeYang,ShinTsonWu, "Fundamentals of Liquid Crystal Devices",Revised

edition,John Wiley and sons,2015

3. SalehandTeich,"Fundamentals of Photonics",WileyInterscience,2ndEdition,2013.

4. J. Singh, “Electronic and Optoelectronic Properties of Semiconductor Structures“,

Cambridge Universitypress,2007.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 3 1 1 2
Average 3 2.8 2.6 1 1 2

143
EC23007 SIGNAL INTEGRITY L T P C

2 0 2 3

UNIT I COUPLED LINE FUNDAMENTALS 6

Maxwell’s Equations, Common Vector Operators - Wave Propagations- Reflections of

Electromagnetic Waves - Coupled Wave Equations - Coupled Line Analysis – Modal Analysis –
Crosstalk Minimization

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL SIGNALLING 6

Removal of Common Mode Noise - Differential Crosstalk - Virtual Reference Plane –

Propagation of Modal Voltages - Common Terminology - Drawbacks of Differential Signaling.

UNIT III CHANNEL MODELLING 6

Frequency domain effects in time domain analysis – Requirements for a physical channel -
Creating a Physical Transmission Line Model – Non-ideal return paths

UNIT IV I/O CIRCUIT MODELLING 6

I/O Design Considerations - Push-Pull Transmitters - CMOS Receivers - ESD Protection Circuits
– On-Chip Termination – Bergeron diagrams

UNIT V MODELLING AND BUDGETTING OF TIMING JITTER AND 6

NOISE

Eye diagram – Bit error rate – Jitter sources and Budgets – Noise sources and Budgets – Peak
distortion analysis methods – Mixed signal design considerations
THEORY : 30 PERIODS

PRACTICAL EXERCISES:

1. Generation of the high-frequency differential signal using an arbitrary waveform

generator
2. Measurement of near-end and far-end crosstalk (NEXT & FEXT) using vector network
analyzer
3. Generate an Eye diagram and conduct measurements on the timing parameters.
4. Perform the Time Domain Reflectometry test.
5. Perform the jitter analysis using the spectral and Q-scale methods for detailed
decomposition of jitter components, including the extraction of industry-standard dual-
Dirac model parameters
6. Generate LVDS signal and conduct signal integrity measurements.

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS:

1. 2 channel 1 GHz Arbitary waveform generator

2. Two-port vector network analyzer and accessories
3. 2GHz 4 flex channel scope with automated jitter and eye diagram measurement
4. LVDS measurement suite 121 C
144
 PRATICAL: 30 PERIODS

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Apply the fundamental concepts of signal integrity in high-speed PCBs and
mitigate reflection and crosstalk.

CO2: Interpret the frequency dependence of dielectrics and apply concepts of differential
signaling.

CO3: Describe various aspects of high-speed channel modelling.

CO4: Explain the design considerations high speed I/O circuits.

CO5: Interpret jitter and noise and perform budgeting.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hall Stephen H. and Howard L. Heck, Advanced Signal Integrity for High-Speed
Digital Designs, Wiley Publications, 2009

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mike Peng Li, Jitter, Noise, and Signal Integrity at High-Speed, Prentice Hall, 2007

2. Paul G. Huray, The Foundations of Signal Integrity, Wiley Publications, 2010

3. Stephen C. Thierauf, Understanding Signal Integrity, Artech House, 2011

4. Samuel H Russ, Signal Integrity: Applied Electromagnetics and Professional

Practice, Springer International publishing, 2016

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 2
Average 3 3 3 3 1.6 1 2

145
EC23010 COGNITIVE RADIO NETWORKS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO AND ITS ARCHITECTURE 9

Definitions and potential benefits, software radio architecture evolution, technology tradeoffs
and architecture implications. Essential functions of the software radio, SDR, hardware
architecture, software architecture, top level component interfaces, interface topologies
among plug and play modules.

UNIT II COGNITIVE RADIOS AND ITS ARCHITECTURE 9

Marking radio self-aware, cognitive techniques – position awareness, environment

awareness in cognitive radios, optimization of radio resources, Cognitive Radio – functions,
components and design rules, Cognition cycle – orient, plan, decide and act phases,
Inference Hierarchy, Architecture maps, Building the Cognitive Radio Architecture on
Software defined Radio Architecture

UNIT III SPECTRUM SENSING AND IDENTIFICATION 9

Primary Signal Detection: Energy Detector, Cyclostationary Feature Detector, Matched

Filter ,Cooperative Sensing , Definition and Implications of Spectrum Opportunity,
Spectrum Opportunity Detection , Fundamental Trade-offs: Sensing Accuracy versus
Sensing Overhead.

UNIT IV INFORMATION THEORETICAL LIMITS ON CR 9

NETWORKS

Types of Cognitive Behavior, Interference-Avoiding Behavior: Spectrum Interweave,

Interference-Controlled Behavior: Spectrum Underlay, Underlay in Small Networks:
Achievable Rates, Underlay in Large Networks: Scaling Laws, Interference-Mitigating
Behavior: Spectrum Overlay, Opportunistic Interference Cancellation

UNIT V USER COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS 9

User Cooperation and Cognitive Systems , Relay Channels: General Three-Node Relay
Channel, Wireless Relay Channel , User Cooperation in Wireless Networks: Two-User
Cooperative Network, Cooperative Wireless Network , Multihop Relay Channel
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have

CO1:Ability to understand the basics of SDR and cognitive radio

CO2:Ability understand the architecture of cognitive radio and SDR
CO3:Ability to identify the role of spectrum sensing and dynamic spectrum access

146
CO4: Ability to apply the concept of cognitive radio in wireless networks for capacity
enhancements.
CO5: Ability to apply the cooperative communication in CR system.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, MaziarNekovee, And Y. Thomas Hou, “Cognitive

Radio Communications and Networks - Principles And Practice”, Elsevier Inc. ,
2010.
2. Kwang-Cheng Chen and Ramjee Prasad, “Cognitive Radio Networks”, John
Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2009.

3. Khattab, Ahmed, Perkins, Dmitri, Bayoumi, Magdy, “Cognitive Radio Networks

- From Theory to Practice”, Springer Series, Analog Circuits and Signal
Processing, 2009.

4. J. Mitola, “Cognitive Radio: An Integrated Agent Architecture for software

defined radio”, Doctor of Technology thesis, Royal Inst. Technology, Sweden
2000.

5. Simon Haykin, “Cognitive Radio: Brain –empowered wireless communications”,

IEEE Journal on selected areas in communications, Feb 2005.

6. Ian F. Akyildiz, Won – Yeol Lee, Mehmet C. Vuran, Shantidev Mohanty, “Next
generation / dynamic spectrum access / cognitive radio wireless networks: A
Survey Elsevier Computer Networks”, May 2006

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1
Average 1.6 2 1 1 1

147
EC23011 SATELLITECOMMUNICATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I SATELLITE ORBITS AND TRAJECTORIES 8

Orbital Mechanics—Orbit Equations, Kepler‘s Laws, Orbital Period, Orbits and their types,
look angle calculation; Satellite Launch.

UNIT II SATELLITE SUBSYSTEM 8

Satellite Subsystems—AOCS, TTC&M, Power, Transponders, Antennas; earth control-

Effects of earth-Perturbation, suntransit, moontransit, satellite power design, MTBF.

UNIT III SATELLITE LINK DESIGN 10

Basic Equations; System Noise and G/T ratio; Uplink, Downlink and Design for a specified
C/N ratio, with GEO and LEO examples; Atmospheric and Rain effects on link performance.
Single link design-double link design aspects, Review of modulation techniques for satellite
communication; Error control requirements for satellite link—ARQ, Concatenated Codes,
Interleaving, Turbo codes.

UNIT IV MULTIPLE ACCESS FOR SATELLITE 9

COMMUNICATIONS

FDM-FM-FDMA - TDMA-structure, standards and system design; Onboard Processing

systems; DAMA and PAMA; CDMA-system design and capacity.

UNIT V SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 10

Communication Satellite - Frequency bands, Orbits, Payload, Satellite Telephony, Satellite

Radio, Satellite television, Regional satellite systems, National satellite systems.
Remote sensing satellite - Orbits, payload, Types of image: image classification,
Interpretation. Weather forecasting satellites – Orbits, payloads, applications.
Navigation Satellites – development of satellite navigation systems, GPS system,
Applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1:Ability to understand about satellite orbits, trajectories and their associated
parameters.

CO2:Knowledge on electronic subsystem associated with the satellite and earth station.

148
CO3:Ability to compute the satellite link parameters under various propagation conditions.

CO4: Ability to understand about multiple access technique and standards used for
satellite communication systems.

CO5: Ability to understand about satellite applications in communication, remote sensing,

weather forecasting and navigation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite Communication”, 4th Edition, Mc Graw

Hill International, 2017.

2. Timothy Pratt, Charles, [Link], Jeremy [Link], "Satellite

Communication”, 3rd Edition, Wiley Publications,2021.

3. Anil K. Maina, Varsha Agrawal, “Satellite Communications”, Wiley

India Pvt Ltd, 2015, ISBN: 978-81-265-2071-8.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.
[Link], H G Suyderhoud and R A Nelson, "Satellite
Communication System Engineering", Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 1993.

2. Tri. T. Ha, "Digital Satellite Communications', McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition,

1990.

3. [Link], "Design of Geosynchronous Space Craft", Prentice Hall,

1986.

4. M. Richharia, "Satellite Systems for Personal Applications", John Wiley,

2010

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 1
Average 2.6 2.6 1 1 1 1

149
EC23012 OPTICAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I OPTICAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9

SYSTEMS

Introduction – Indoor Optical Wireless Communication Channel : LOS & Non-LOS

Propagation Model Ceiling Bounce Model - Artificial Light Interference - Outdoor Channel :
Atmospheric Channel Loss, Fog and Visibility, Beam Divergence, Optical and Window Loss,
Pointing Loss , Atmospheric Turbulence effects

UNIT II MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9

Analogue Intensity Modulation - Digital Baseband Modulation Techniques - Pulse Position

Modulation and Variants - Pulse Interval Modulation - Dual-Header PIM (DH-PIM) -
Comparisons of Baseband Modulation Schemes - Subcarrier Intensity Modulation -
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing - Optical Polarization Shift Keying.

UNIT III FSO LINK PERFORMANCE UNDER 9

TURBULENCE

On–Off Keying Performance in Poisson and Gaussian Atmospheric Optical Channel, Pulse
Position Modulation, Subcarrier Intensity Modulation : Generation and Detection, SIM-FSO
Performance in Log-Normal Atmospheric Channel, BER of SIM-FSO and Outage Probability
in Log-Normal Atmospheric Channels - Atmospheric Turbulence-Induced Penalty.

UNIT IV OUTDOOR OWC LINKS WITH DIVERSITY 9

TECHNIQUES

Atmospheric Turbulence Mitigation Techniques - Receiver Diversity in Log-Normal

Atmospheric Channels : Maximum Ratio Combining, Equal Gain Combining, Selection
Combining, Effect of Received Signal Correlation on Error Performance & Outage Probability
– Transmit Diversity & Transmit – Receive Diversity - Terrestrial Free Space Optical Links with
Subcarrier Time Diversity – Aperture Averaging.

UNIT V VISIBLE LIGHT COMMUNICATIONS 9

Introduction - System Description: VLC System Model, SNR Analysis, Channel Delay Spread
- System Implementations: Bit Angle Modulation, Pulse Modulation Schemes, PWM with
Discrete Multitone Modulation, Multilevel PWM-PPM, PWM with NRZ-OOK - Multiple-Input–
Multiple-Output VLC - Home Access Network.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

150
At the end of the course, students will have
CO1: Ability to understand the characteristics of optical wireless communication
systems

CO2: Ability to describe the different modulation techniques involved with OWC
systems

CO3: Ability to understand and analyze the free space optical link performance

CO4: Ability to understand the characteristics of various diversity techniques for

outdoor OWC systems

CO5: Ability to understand the VLC systems and its modulation techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Z. Ghassenlooy, [Link] and S. Rajbhandari, “Optical Wireless Communications

– System and Channel Modelling with MATLAB”, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis
Group, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ivan B. Djordjevic, “Advanced Optical and Wireless Communication Systems”,

Springer, 2018.

2. Murat Uysal Carlo Capsoni Zabih Ghassemlooy Anthony Boucouvalas Eszter Udvary
Editors, “Optical Wireless Communications - An Emerging Technology”, Springer,
2018.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO5 2 2 2 1 1 1
Average 2.2 2.2 2 1 1 1 1

151
EC23013 DIGITAL SWITCHING AND NETWORKING L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9

Overview of existing Voice, Data and Multimedia Networks and Services; Review of Basic
Communication principles; Synchronous and Asynchronous transmission,Line Codes

UNIT II TRUNK TRANSMISSION 9

Multiplexing & Framing- types and standards;Trunk signaling; Optical Transmission-line

codes and Muxing: SONET/SDH; ATM; Microwave and Satellite Systems.

UNIT III LOCAL LOOPTRANSMISSION 9

The Analog Local Loop; ISDN local loop; DSL and ADSL; Wireless Local Loop; Fiber in the
loop; Mobile and Satellite Phone local loop.

UNIT IV SWITCHING 9

Evolution: Space switching, Time switching and Combination Switching; Blocking and Delay
characteristics; Message ,Packet and ATM switching; Advances in switching techniques –
shared memory fast packet switches, shared medium fast packet switches and space division
fast packet switches,Photonic switching-Optical TDM,WDM.

UNIT V TELETRAFFIC ENGINEERING 9

Telecom Network Modeling; Arrival Process; Network Blocking performance; Delay Networks-
Queuing system analysis and delay performance.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to comprehend existing voice and data communication networking
techniques

CO2: Ability to understand the different type of signaling,optical and satellite

networks

CO3: Ability to analyse the different local loop data transmission schemes.

CO4: Ability to analyse the different switching schemes.

CO5: Ablity to understand tele traffic models and performances

152
TEXT BOOKS:

1. J. Bellamy,"DigitalTelephony",JohnWiley,3rdEdition,2003.

2. JEFlood,"Telecommunications Switching,Traffic and Networks",Pearson,2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. [Link],"Telephone switching Systems",Artech House Publishers,2000.

2. [Link],"Data and Computer Communications",Prentice Hall,1993.

3. [Link], M.H. Ammar,[Link], "Fundamentals of Telecommunication

Networks",Wiley Interscience,1994.

4. [Link],"Subscriber Loop Signalling and Transmission Handbook",IEEE

PressTelecomm Handbook Series,1995.

5. Tarmo Anttalaien, "Introduction to Telecommunication Network Engineering", Artech

House, 2nd Edition,2003.

6. [Link],"Telecommunication Switching Systems",Prentice-Hall,1992.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1
Average 2.4 2 1 1 1

153
EC23014 ADHOC AND WIRELESS SENSOR L T P C
NETWORKS
3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND APPLICATIONS 9

Introduction to Ad hoc Networks, Characteristic features, Need for Ubiquitous Computing

network, Applications of Ad hoc, Mobility Models: - Brownian Model, Column model, Random
Walk Model, Random Waypoint model, Random Gauss Markov Model, Reference point Group
Mobility Model.

UNIT II ROUTING PROTOCOLS 9

Need for Different routing Protocols, Proactive Vs Reactive Routing. Unicasting: Dynamic
Source Routing, Ad Hoc On-Demand Distance Vector Routing, Temporally Ordered Routing
Algorithm, Signal Stability Based Routing, Location Aided Routing, Associativity Based
Routing, Zone Routing Protocol. Multicasting: Tree Based Algorithm: CAMP, Mesh based
Algorithm: On-Demand Multicast Routing Protocol.

UNIT III OVERVIEW OF WIRELES SENSOR 9

NETWORKS

Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks-Characteristics requirements-required

mechanisms, Difference between mobile ad-hoc and sensor networks, Applications of sensor
networks-Single- Node Architecture, Layered architecture- Hardware Components, Energy
Consumption of Sensor Nodes, Physical Layer and Transceiver Design Considerations.

UNIT IV MAC AND ROUTING PROTOCOLS OF WSN 9

MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks: Low Duty Cycle Protocols, Wakeup Concepts-
S-MAC, PRMA Overview of Address and Name Management, Routing Protocols: Energy-
Efficient Routing.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION AND APPLICATION OF 9

LOWPAN

Introduction - Architecture, Protocol stack - Link layers – Addressing - Header format –

Bootstrapping - Mesh topologies - Internet integration, Functions of an Adaptation
Layer,Routing - Mesh-Under -Route-Over –ROLL, Common Protocols –WSP, MQTTS, CAP,
Operating system – Contiki - μIPv6, case study - Industrial automation - Health care.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to identify the necessity of Adhoc networks and models need for
Adhoc networks

CO2: Ability to analyses different routing protocols & algorithms of Adhoc networks

154
 CO3: Ability to describe the basic requirements of wireless sensor networks

CO4: Ability to analyze various types of MAC and routing algorithms of WSN

CO5: Ability to apply Internet protocol version 6 to WSN and software

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Charles E. Perkins, "Ad hoc Networking", Addison-Wesley,2008.

2. Holger Karl & Andreas Willig, "Protocols And Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks", John Wiley,2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Feng Zhao & Leoni das J. Guibas, “"Wireless Sensor Networks, An Information
Processing Approach", Elsevier,2016.

2. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, & Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks-
Technology, Protocols, And Applications”, John Wiley,2015.

3. Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann,“―6LoWPAN:The Wireless Embedded Internet”,

John Wiley& Sons, 2009.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1
Average 2.6 2 2 1 1

155
EC23015 RADAR TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO RADAR 9

The Origins of Radar, Radar principles, Basic Block Diagram, Radar classifications based
on Frequencies, Radar Fundamentals: Detection,Range,velocity,Radar range Equation,
Pulsed Radar equation, Detection of Signals in Noise- Receiver Noise,Signal-to-Noise
Ratio, Probabilities of Detection and False Alarm, Integration of Radar Pulses, Radar
Cross Section of Targets, Transmitter Power, Pulse Repetition Frequency, Antenna
Parameters,System losses

UNIT II CW, MTI AND PULSE DOPPLER RADAR 9

CW and Frequency Modulated Radar, Doppler and MTI Radar- Delay Line
Cancellers,Staggered Pulse Repetition Frequencies, Doppler Filter Banks, Digital MTI
Processing, MovingTarget Detector, Limitations to MTI Performance, MTI from a Moving
Platform(AMIT), Pulse Doppler Radar, Doppler spectrum of fluctuating targets, Range
Doppler spectrum of stationary and moving radar.

UNIT III TRACKING RADAR 9

Tracking with Radar, Mono pulse Tracking, Conical Scan, Sequential Lobing, Limitations
to Tracking Accuracy, Low-Angle Tracking - Comparison of Trackers, Track while Scan
(TWS) Radar-Target prediction,state estimation, Measurement models,Kalman Filtering,
Extended Kalman filtering

UNIT IV RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING 9

Radar Signal Processing Fundamentals, Detection strategies, Optimal

detection,Threshold detection, Constant False alarm rate detectors, Adaptive CFAR,
pulse compression waveforms, compression gain, LFM waveforms matched filtering,
Binary phase coded pulse compression; Barker codes; Quadriphase code;Polyphase
codes;Costas codes; radar ambiguity functions, radar resolution, Detection of radar
signals in Noise and clutter, detection of non-fluctuating target in noise,

UNIT V RADAR TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9

RadarTransmitter, Linear Beam Power Tubes, Solid State RF Power Sources,

Magnetron,Crossed Field Amplifiers,Other RF [Link] Receiver,Receiver
noise power, Super heterodyne Receiver, Duplexers and Receiver Protectors-
RadarDisplays. Radar Antenna - Reflector Antennas - Electronically Steered Phased
Array Antennas–Phase Shifters
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

156
At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Identify the Radar parameters

CO2: Differentiate various radar types

CO3: Evaluate different tracking and filtering schemes

CO4: Apply signal processing in target detection

CO5: Design Radar transmitter and receiver blocks

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Habibur Rahman, Fundamental Principles of Radar, CRC press, Taylor and

Francis,2019.

2. [Link],“Introduction to Radar Systems”,TataMcGrawHill2006.

3. M. R. Richards, J. A. Scheer, W. A. Holm, Editors “Principles of Modern Radar, Basic

Principles”,SciTechPublishing,2012

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Nathansan, “Radar design principles-Signal processing and environment”, PHI,

2ndEdition,2007.

2. [Link],“Fundamentals of Radar Signal Processing”,McGraw-Hill,2005.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2
Average 3 2.2 2.2 2.6 2.4 1 1 1.6 2

157
EC23016 MICROWAVE ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I MICROWAVE THEORY AND TWO PORT 10

NETWORKS

Introduction to microwave theory and component basics, wire, resistor, capacitor and
inductor – properties - Low frequency parameters-impedance, admittance, hybrid and
ABCD. High frequency parameters - Formulation of S parameters, properties of S
parameters - Reciprocal and lossless networks, transmission matrix.
UNIT II MICROWAVE FILTER DESIGN AND 10
MATCHING NETWORKS

Tuned Circuits, Filter design- Low Pass Butterworth filter, Low Pass Chebyshev filter,
Microstrip Realization – Impedance matching networks, frequency response, T and Π
matching networks, microstrip-line matching networks.

UNIT III MICROWAVE SOURCES AND 9

COMPONENTS

Microwave Diodes - PN Junction, Varactor, Schottky, PIN, Tunnel, and GUNN Diode,
Microwave Attenuators, Microwave RF Switches, power divider, directional coupler, phase
shifter, circulator, isolator. Microwave Tubes.

UNIT IV MICROWAVE AMPLIFIERS AND 8

OSCILLATORS DESIGN

Amplifier /oscillator with two terminal device - Amplifier /oscillator configurations with
IMPATT/Gunn diodes – Amplifier / oscillator with three terminal microwave transistor- Two
cavity klystron amplifier, Reflex klystron oscillator, TWT amplifier, Magnetron oscillator –
Theory and applications.

UNIT V MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS 8

Measuring Instruments – VSWR meter, Power meter, Spectrum Analyser, Network Analyser
– principles; Measurement of Impedance, frequency, power, VSWR, Q factor, dielectric
constant, S-Parameter. Hazards of microwaves, permitted power levels for practical
applications - effect of microwaves on human body.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

158
 CO1: Understand the basics of microwave theory and techniques.

CO2: Apply techniques to design filters and matching networks for high frequency
applications.

CO3: Remember microwave devices & components used in Microwave

communication systems.

CO4: Design and analyze the amplifiers and oscillators.

CO5: Evaluate the microwave systems by Measuring Microwave signal

parameters.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Subal Kar, “Microwave Engineering - Fundamentals , Design and Applications”,
University Press , first edition, 2016
2. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, ―Microwave Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Inc.,
2nd edition, 2014.
3. [Link], "Microwave Engineering", John Wiley and Sons, 4 th Edition, 2021.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

CO2 2 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2

CO3 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

CO4 2 3 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2

CO5 3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

Average 2.4 2.4 2.2 2.4 1.2 1.4 1 1 1 1 2 2

159
EC23017 PASSIVE RFAND MICROWAVE INTEGRATED L T P C
CIRCUITS
3 0 0 3

UNIT I PASSIVE RF COMPONENTS 9

Passive components: Inductors,Capacitors, Resistors, Via-holes and grounding, Microstrip

components and Coplanar waveguide –Micro machined passive [Link] –
Applications – Multi-chip module technology.

UNIT II FILTERS AND PHASE SHIFTERS 9

Classification – filter synthesis- low pass filters – band pass filters – Kuroda’s identities – diode
phase shifters- ferrite phase shifters – differential phase shifters.

UNIT III AMPLIFIERS 9

Introduction – Classical stability and gain analysis – Matching techniques – Lossy matching -
FET feedback amplifier – Power amplifiers – Low noise amplifiers.

UNIT IV OSCILLATORS 9

Introduction – Design principles – Active device – CAD techniques for large-signal oscillator
design – Phase noise in oscillators – MMIC Voltage controlled oscillator design – MMIC
Injection locked oscillator design.

UNIT V MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES 9

Test fixture measurement – Probe station measurement – Thermal and cryogenic

measurements – Experimental field probing techniques.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Understand the various passive microwave components and its fabrication
procedures

160
 CO2: Design microwave integrated amplifiers, oscillators, phase shifters and filters
CO3: Analyze the stability of amplifiers and oscillators.
CO4: Interpret the types of filters and phase shifters.
CO5: Summarize the various measurement techniques for MIC technology

TEXT BOOKS
1. Robertson ID, Lucyszyn S, RFIC and MMIC Design and Technology, Institution
of Engineering and Technology; 2nd Edition, 2001.

2. Leo G Maloratsky, “Passive RF and microwave integrated circuits”,Elsevier,

2004.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 3 2 3 1 1

CO3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1

CO4 3 1 1 1 1 1

CO5 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
Average 3 1 1.4 1.8 3 1 1 1

161
EC23018 ELECTRONIC WARFARE L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I ELECTRONIC WARFARE (EW) PRINCIPLES AND 10
OVERWIEW

Electronic Warfare Taxonomy mission and scenarios; ESM; Introduction to Signals

intelligence (SIGINT), Electronic Counter Measures (ECM), Electronic Counter
Countermeasures (ECCM); Electronic Support Measure (ESM) Receivers; Radar Warning
Receivers (RWR), current ESM receivers; Passive direction finding and emitter location.

UNIT II ELECTRONIC COUNTER MEASURES (ECM) 10

Noise jamming; Deception Electronic Counter Measures (DECM); Rangr gate deception;
Angle deception; ECM against Conical scanning Tracking radars, Monopulse Tracking radars
and Pulse compression; Velocity Deception; Modern ECM systems; Expandable Electronic
Counter Measures.
UNIT III RADAR ELECTRONIC COUNTER - COUNTER 9
MEASURES (ECCM)

Radar applications in Weapon systems; Surveillance Radars and its detection Range – clear
and jamming Environments; Surveillance Radars Frequency tradeoffs and ECCM
considerations. ECM jamming Equations; Repeater jammer equations; EW receiver
sensitivity.
UNIT IV EW SIGNAL PROCESSING 8
Signal environment - EM sensor subsystem; The receiver subsystem; The pre-processor; data
servo loop; Mile parameter tracking; Advanced pulley power; Managed Jamming; EW
technology and Future trends.
UNIT V NAVIGATION AND LANDING AIDS 8

Principles of Automatic Direction Finders; DME;VOR; TACAN, Instrument Landing System,

Microwave landing System; GPS operation; 3D position Determination; GPS based Landing
system.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

162
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Know the principles of electronic warfare, electronic support measure and
electronic counter measures

CO2: Performance analysis of Radar Warning Receivers and modern ECM

CO3: Explain system assessment, counter measures (ECCM)

CO4: Work in EM signal Processing

CO5: Work using radio Navigational techniques and GPS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Curtis Schleher. D. ― ‘Introduction to Electronic Warfare’, Artech House Inc.,

U.S.A., 1986

2. Skolnik, M.I. “Introduction to Radar System”, Third Edition, McGrawHill, 2017.

3. Myron Kayton, Walter R. Fried, “ Avionics Navigation Systems” John Wiley &
Sons, 1997.

4. Nagaraja, N.S. “Elements of Electronic Navigation”, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co.,

New Delhi, 2nd edition, 2004.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2

CO3 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2

CO4 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 2

CO5 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 2 2

Average 2.4 2.8 1.8 2.8 1 2 1 1 1.4 1.8

163
EC23019 ADVANCED ANTENNAS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I ANTENNA PARAMETERS AND ARRAYS 10

Introduction –Types of Antennas – Radiation Mechanism – Current distribution on wire

antennas – Maxwell’s equations - Antenna fundamental parameters
One Dimensional Arrays,Linear array –uniform array, end fire and broad side array, gain,
beam width, side lobe level;Two dimensional uniform arrays;smart antennas,switched beam
and adaptive arrays, phased arrays.

UNIT II MICROSTRIP ANTENNA 10

Radiation Mechanism and Excitation techniques : Microstrip dipole; Patch, Rectangular patch,
Circular patch, and Ring antenna – radiation analysis from cavity model; input impedance of
rectangular and circular patch antenna; Microstrip array and feed network; Reconfiguration
Mechanisms; Computer Aided Design of Microstrip Antennas, Microstrip Reflectarray
Antennas, Microstrip antenna for 5G mobile networks.

UNIT III ANTENNAS FOR 5G NETWORKS 9

Advanced antenna for 5G networks, digital and analog beam forming, Multi- antenna
features, Multi user MIMO,cell- specific beam forming, UE-specific beam forming, advanced
antenna system for network deployments, multi antenna performance in macro network
deployments, deployment scenarios and considerations.

UNIT IV ANTENNAS FOR OTHER APPLICATIONS 8

Mobile phone antenna, base station, hand set antenna PIFA – Vivaldi Antennas - UWB
Antennas - Antennas in Medicine – Leaky Wave Antennas – Plasma Antennas – Wearable
Antennas – RFID Antennas - Automotive antennas, Reconfigurable antennas - Meta
materials.

164
UNIT V TERAHERTZ ANTENNAS 8

Material for Tera Hertz antennas. Tera Hertz sources, Tera Hertz antennas, Planar antenna
and arrays, Reflect arrays, Lens antennas, Horn antennas, CNT antennas, Graphene
antennas, applications of Tera Hertz antennas.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Understand the basic antenna parameters and arrays

CO2: Design microstrip antennas

CO3: Identify the concepts of antenna for 5G network applications

CO4: Develop antennas for various applications

CO5: Understand the theory of Tera Hertz antennas

TEXT BOOKS
1. Krauss.J.D, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmed S khan, “Antennas and Wave
Propagation”, Fifth edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.

2. Peter von Butovitsch, Henrik Asplund, David Astely, Thomas Chapman, Mattias
Frenne, Farshid Ghasemzadeh, Måns Hagström, Billy Hogan, George Jöngren,
Jonas Karlsson, Fredric Kronestedt and Erik Larsson, “Advanced Antenna
Systems for 5G Network Deployments” Academic Press, 1st edition, 2020.

3. Saim Ghafoor, Mubashir Husain Rehmani, Alan Davy, ” Next Generation

Wireless Terahertz Communication Networks” 1 st edition, Taylor and Francis
group ,2021.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Average 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3

165
EC23020 PIC MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I 8-BIT PIC MICROCONTROLLER AND BASIC

PERIPHERALS 9

Microprocessors and microcontrollers, introducing PIC 16F877- architecture, memory

technologies, timing circuits, power-up and reset, parallel ports, ADC, interrupt, serial peripheral
buses (UART, I2C, SPI), PWM, counters and timers, instruction set and assembly language
programming.

UNIT II 16-BIT PIC MICROCONTROLLER 9

DsPIC30F microcontroller- architecture, DSP engine, memory, parallel ports, system and
power management, ADC, interrupt, PWM.

UNIT III PIC DEVELOPMENT TOOLS AND PROGRAMMING 9

Software development tools- editor, assembler, compiler, cross-compiler and simulator,

Hardware development tools- development board, device programmer, in-circuit emulator and
debuggers. Embedded C Programming, data types and variables, data type modifiers, storage
Class modifiers, C statements, structures and operations, pointers, libraries, in-line assembly
programming, optimizing and testing embedded C programs.

UNIT IV MULTITASKING AND THE REAL-TIME OPERATING

SYSTEM 9

The challenge of multitasking and real time, multitasking with sequential programming, State
machines, Real time operating system, RTOS services, synchronization and messaging tools,
CCS PIC C Compiler RTOS. Design example: Voltmeter with RS232 serial output.

UNIT V PERIPHERAL INTERFACING WITH PIC 9

MICROCONTROLLER

166
Human and physical interfaces- switches to keyboard, LED display, liquid crystal display,
Actuators and sensors, PWM, serial communication protocols (UART, I2C, SPI), programming
interrupt, timers and counter.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
CO1: Ability to design and develop PIC microcontroller based systems.
CO2: Ability to comprehend and appreciate DSP in PIC microcontrollers.
CO3: Ability to analyze, demonstrate and apply proper development tools for PIC
microcontrollers.
CO4: Ability to apply the concept of multitasking and RTOS in embedded system design.
CO5: Ability to implement various communication protocols and interfacing concepts in
embedded system.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. David. E. Simon, "An Embedded Software Primer", Addison-Wesley, Reprint 2015.

2. Kirk Zurell, "C programming for Embedded Systems", CRC Press, 2016.
3. Dogan Ibrahim, "Advanced PIC microcontroller projects in C", Newnes publication,
2012.
4. Tim Wilmshurst, "Designing Embedded Systems with PIC microcontrollers-Principles
andApplications", Newnes Publications, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Douglas [Link], "Microprocessor and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware", Tata
Mc Graw Hill Revised, 2nd Edition 2016, 11th Reprint 2011.
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, RolinMcKinlay, Danny Causey, "PIC Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C for PIC18", Prentice Hall publications,
2007
3. Julio Sanchez Maria [Link], “Microcontroller Programming: The microchip PIC”,
CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group,2007
4. Martin Bates, "Interfacing PIC microcontrollers-Embedded Design by Interactive
Simulation",Newnes Publication, 2006

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

167
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
Average 1 2 1.8 1.6 1 1 1 1

EC23021 ADVANCED MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C

3 0 0 3
UNIT I RISC PROCESSORS 9

RISC Vs CISC, RISC properties and evolution, Advanced RISC microcontrollers, PIC18xx
microcontroller family, Architecture, Instruction set, ROM, RAM, Timer programming, Serial port
programming, Interrupt programming, ADC and DAC interfacing, CCP module and
programming.
UNIT II CISC PROCESSORS 9

RL78 16 BIT Microcontroller architecture, addressing modes, on-Chip memory, ADC, interrupts,
MAC unit, Barrel shifter, internal and external clock generation, memory CRC, on chip debug
function and self programming.
UNIT III MSP430 16 - BIT MICROCONTROLLER 9

The MSP430 Architecture, CPU Registers, Instruction Set, addressing modes, the MSP430
family viz. MSP430x2x, MSP430x4x, MSP430x5x. Low power aspects of MSP430 : low power
modes, active Vs standby current consumption, FRAM Vs Flash for low power and reliability.

168
UNIT IV PROGRAMMING AND PERIPHERAL INTERFACE USING 9
MSP430 FAMILIES

Memory mapped peripherals, I/O pin multiplexing, Timers, RTC, watchdog timer, PWM control,
Analog interfacing and data acquisition, DMA, programming with above internal peripherals
using optimal power consumption. Case study: Remote control of air conditioner and home
appliances.
UNIT V COMMUNICATION INTERFACE USING MSP 430 9
MICROCONTROLLER

Serial and parallel communication, synchronous and asynchronous interfaces, Implementing

and programming of : UART, I2C and SPI protocol. wireless connectivity : NFC, Zigbee,
bluetooth and WiFi. MSP430 development tools. Case study: Implementing WiFi connectivity in
smart electric meter.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
CO1: Ability to discriminate RISC and CISC processors, and work with PIC microcontrollers.
CO2:Ability to work with the 16 bit microcontroller RL78 and design microcontroller based
systems for a Real world application.
CO3: Gaining design knowledge and concepts on MSP430 family of Microcontroller.
CO4: Ability to design real time systems by deploying Interfacing peripherals with MSP430.
CO5: Ability to design and develop microcontroller based smart electronic system
communication protocols.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alaxander G, James M. Conard, " Creating fast, Responsive and energy efficient
Embedded systems using the Renesas RL78 microcontroller", Micrium press, USA,
Reprinted by S.P Printers, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolind D. Mckinlay and Danny Causey. "PIC Microcontroller
and Embedded Systems", Pearson Education, 2008.
2. John H. Davies, "MSP 430 Micro controller basics", Elsevier, 2008

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

169
 CO5 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
Average 1 2 1.8 1.6 1 1 1 1

170
EC23022 REAL TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I EMBEDDED DESIGN PROCESS AND HARDWARE 9

COMPONENTS

Complex Systems and RISC processors - Embedded System Design Process - Formalism for
System Design - CPU – CPU Bus–CPU performance-CPU Power Consumption – Memory
System Mechanism– Configuring and Programming Input and Output Peripherals - Supervisor
Mode, Exceptions and Traps -Coprocessors.

UNIT II SOFTWARE TOOLS AND EMBEDDED C PROGRAMMING 9

Compilation process - Native vs Cross-Compilers - Run-time libraries - Writing a library - Using

Standard and alternative libraries - Porting Kernels – Techniques for Emulation and Debugging
– Embedded C Program Structure – Data types - Operators, expressions and controlstatements
– Functions and Procedures - Structures and union- Linux Programming

UNIT III REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM 9

Concurrent Software – Foreground/Background systems, Multi-threaded Programming, shared

resources and Critical sections – Scheduling – Cyclic, Round-Robin, Priority based, Deadline
driven and Rate Monotonic schedules – Memory Management – Shared Memory -Commercial
operating systems. Evaluating operating system performance – Power optimization strategies
for processes

UNIT IV HARDWARE ACCELERATORS & NETWORKS 9

Multiprocessors- CPUs and Accelerators – Performance Analysis- Distributed Embedded

Architecture – Networks for Embedded Systems: - I2C, CAN Bus, Ethernet, Myrinet – Network
based design – Internet enabled systems

UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEM APPLICATIONS- CASE STUDY 9

Design Methodology- Elevator controller, Water level controller, Traffic Light Control System,
Temperature monitoring and control system, ink jet printer, ATM machine- - Design of Real time
embedded systems

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Explain about different hardware components and software development tools.

CO2: Utilize the Embedded C program methodology for building real time systems.

CO3: Detail the concept and usage of RTOS in Embedded applications.

171
 CO4: Apply the communication protocol in Embedded System development.

CO5: Design a real time embedded system.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Wayne Wolf, "Computers as Components –Principles of Embedded Computing

System Design", Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2nd Edition, June2008.
2. Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, "ARM System Developer's
Guide-Designing and Optimizing System Software", Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers,2004.
3. SteveHeath, "Embedded Systems Design", Newnes Publications, 2nd Edition,2003.

4. Kirk Zurell, “C Programming for Embedded Systems”, R & D Books, 2000

5. [Link], “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design &

Programming”, Dream tech press, 2005.
6. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Elsevier, 2006.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
Average 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.4 1.4 1 1 1 3 3

172
EC23023 OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9

Introduction to operating systems – Computer system organization, architecture – Operating

system structure, operations – Process, memory, storage management – Protection and
security – Distributed systems – Computing Environments – Open-source operating systems
– OS services – User operating-system interface – System calls – Types – System programs
– OS structure – OS generation – System Boot – Process concept, scheduling – Operations
on processes – Cooperating processes – Inter-process communication – Examples –
Multithreading models – Thread Libraries – Threading issues – OS examples

UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9

Basic concepts – Scheduling criteria – Scheduling algorithms – Thread scheduling – Multiple

processor scheduling – Operating system examples – Algorithm Evaluation – The critical-section
129 problem – Peterson‘s solution – Synchronization hardware – Semaphores – Classic
problems of synchronization – Critical regions – Monitors – Synchronization examples –
Deadlocks – System model – Deadlock characterization – Methods for handling deadlocks –
Deadlock Prevention – Deadlock Avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery from deadlock

UNIT III STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9

Memory Management – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation – Paging –Segmentation –

Example: The Intel Pentium - Virtual Memory: Background – Demand paging – Copy on write –
Page replacement – Allocation of frames – Thrashing.

UNIT IV FILE AND DISK MANGEMENT 9

File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File-system mounting –Protection –

Directory implementation – Allocation methods – Free-space management – Disk scheduling
– Disk management – Swap-space management – Protection

UNIT V INTERPROCESS COMMUNICATION 9

The Linux System – History – Design Principles – Kernel Modules – Process Management –
Scheduling – Memory management – File systems – Input and Output – Inter-process
Communication – Network Structure – Security – Windows 7 – History – Design Principles –
System Components – Terminal Services and Fast User – File system – Networking.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to articulate the main concepts, key ideas, strengths and limitations of
operating systems
173
 CO2: Ability to understand the process management of operating systems
CO3: Ability to interpret various storage management in operating systems.
CO4: Ability to understand file concepts and various technical management in OS.
CO5: Ability to know about the scheduling concepts and inter-process communications.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, "Operating System Concepts

Essentials", John Wiley & Sons Inc., 10th Edition, 2019.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, "Modern Operating Systems", Addison Wesley, 4th Edition,

2016.

2. Charles Crowley, "Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach", Tata

McGraw Hill Education, 2012.

3. M Dhamdhere, "Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach", Tata Mc Graw-Hill

Education,2nd Edition, 2007

4. William Stallings, "Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles", Prentice

Hall, 7th Edition, 2011.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
Average 1 1 1.4 1.4 1 1 1 1

174
EC23024 PARALLEL AND DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I THEORY OF PARALLELISM 9

Parallel Computer Models- The State of Computing, Multiprocessors and Multicomputer and
Multivectors and SIMD computers, PRAM models

UNIT II PARALLEL PROCESSING APPLICATIONS 9

Conditions of parallelism, Program Partitioning and Scheduling, Program Flow Mechanisms,

System Interconnect Architectures. Principles of Scalable Performance, Performance Metrics
and Measures.

UNIT III HARDWARE TECHNOLOGIES 9

Processor and Memory Hierarchy- Advanced Processor Technology, Superscalar and Vector
Processors, Memory Hierarchy Technology, Virtual Memory Technology.

UNIT IV PARALLEL PROGRAMMING 9

Parallel Programming Models- Shared Memory Multiprocessors- Constructs for specifying

Parallelism- Sharing data- Parallel Programming Languages and Constructs- Open MP–
Introduction.

UNIT V DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS 9

Models, Hardware concepts, communication, synchronization mechanism, case study: MPI and
PVM, Distributed file systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Apply the Problem Solving Techniques in Parallel Computing

CO2: Solve Problems Related to Memory Management

CO3: Design Efficient Memory Hierarchical Scheme

CO4: Translate the Information from Virtual Memory to Main Memory

CO5: Design Distributed Systems

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, "Operating System Concepts

Essentials", John Wiley & Sons Inc., 10th Edition, 2019.

175
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kai Hwang &NareshJotwani, “Advanced Computer Architecture”, Tata McGraw Hill

Education Private Limited, Second Edition, 2011.

2. [Link], [Link] Ram Murthy,”Parallel Computers” Architecture and

Programming, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2016.

3. Barry Wilkinson, Michael Allen, “Parallel Programming” Techniques and Applications

using Networked Workstations and Parallel Computers, Pearson, 2012.

4. [Link] F.A., “Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing”, Tata

McGraw Hall, 2014.

5. Quinn M.J, “Designing Efficient Algorithm for Parallel Computers”, Mc Graw Hill,
2003.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
Average 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3

176
EC23C22 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C
DEVELOPMENT
3 0 0 3

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical TrendsEconomical
Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development
Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product
Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle – Product
Development Planning and Management.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering – traceability

Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction to
System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design -Interface
Design.

UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept

generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical,
Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program
- Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and
Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing -
System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation.

UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) 9

SUPPORT

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation

processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation -
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal.

UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus

Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,

177
 Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual
Property Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

178
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Define, formulate and analyze a problem

CO2: Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team

CO3: Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context

CO4: Work independently as well as in teams.

CO5: Manage a project from start to finish.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.

2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata
McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2011.

3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
11thEdition, 2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.

2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier],

Oxford, 2004.

3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –

Concepts”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2003.

4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and

Design", McGraw Hill Education, 7th Edition, 2013

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
Average 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1

179
EC23025 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM PROTOTYPING L T P C

1 0 4 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN 3L

Fundamentals of Electronic Components, Overview of PCB's, Classes and types of PCB's,

Choosing of PCB Materials, TH Components, SMD Components and its form factors, Layout
planning, Placement rules, Routing techniques for PCB's, PCB Dimensions and Tolerances,
Copper Trace and Etching Tolerances, Standard Hole Dimensions, Soldermask Tolerance,
Thermal issues.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO EDA TOOLS 3L,16P

Various EDA Tools, Schematic Design, Schematic Capture, Component Selection, Annotation,
Foot print assignment, Wiring, Design Rule Check, Netlist generation, Convert to PCB,
Component Placement, Manual Routing, Auto Routing, Gerber file generation, Fabrication of
PCB using different Methods.
PRACTICAL:

➢ Design a simple circuit (TH) using EDA tool and convert schematic into layout design.
➢ Fabrication of PCB using traditional method.

UNIT III PCB DESIGN FLOW USING EDA TOOL 3L,16P

Board Manual routing, Cleanup Locking traces, Post processing the board design for
manufacturing. Setting up a user account, Submitting Gerber files and requesting a quote,
Annotating the layer types and stack-up, Receipt inspection and testing, Nonstandard Gerber
files.
PRACTICAL:

➢ Design a simple circuit (SMD) using EDA tool and convert schematic into layout design.
➢ Fabrication of PCB using LASER technology.

UNIT IV COMPONENT PLACEMENT AND ITS ASSEMBLY TECHNIQUE 3L,16P

PCB Assembly and Soldering Processes- Component Placement and Orientation Guide,
Component Spacing for Through-hole Devices. Component Spacing for Surface Mounted
Devices SMDs, Mixed THD and SMD Spacing Requirements. Solder Footprint and Pad stack
Design for PCB Manufacturability, PTH land dimension (annular ring width), Clearance between
plane layers and PTHs Soldermask and solder paste dimensions.
PRACTICAL:

180
 ➢ Drilling of PCB, component placement and its assembly processes using TH
component.
➢ Component placement and its assembly processes using SMD components (PICK
and PLACE).

UNIT V PCB DESIGN FOR SIGNAL INTEGRITY 3L, 12P

Circuit Design Issues Not Related to PCB Layout, Issues Related to PCB Layout, Ground Planes
and Ground Bounce, PCB Electrical Characteristics, PCB Routing Topics, Making and Editing
Capture Parts, The Capture Part Libraries, Types of Packaging, Pins, Part Editing Tools,
Constructing Capture Parts, making and editing layout footprints.
PRACTICAL:

➢ Microscopic inspection of PCB’s and its troubleshooting techniques.

➢ Design an Enclosure for the fabricated PCBs.

THEORY : 15 PERIODS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Design a simple circuit (TH) using EDA tool and convert schematic into layout design.
2. Design a simple circuit (SMD) using EDA tool and convert schematic into layout design.
3. Fabrication of PCB using traditional method.
4. Fabrication of PCB using LASER technology.
5. Drilling of PCB, component placement and its assembly processes using TH component.
6. Component placement and its assembly processes using SMD components (PICK and
PLACE).
7. Microscopic inspection of PCB’s and its troubleshooting techniques.
8. Design an Enclosure for the fabricated PCBs.
PRACTICAL: 60 PERIODS

TOTAL : 75 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able

CO1: To understand the basics and industry standards related to the design and
fabrication of PCBs.

CO2: Leads new users of the software through a very simple design.

CO3: To know and guide in designing plated through-holes, surface-mount lands, and
Layout footprints in general.

CO4: To know to construct capture parts using the Capture Library Manager and Part
Editor.

CO5: To understand and to fabricate PCBs

181
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kraig Mitzner,“Complete PCB Design Using Or Cad Capture and Layout”,

Newness, 1st Edition,2007.
2. Simon Monk,“Make Your Own PCBs with EAGLE:From Schematic Designs to
Finished Boards”,McGraw-HillEducationTAB;2ndEdition,2017.
3. Douglas Brooks, “Signal Integrity Issues and Printed Circuit Board
Design”,PrenticeHall,2012.
4. Lee W. Ritchey , John Zasio, Kella J. Knack, “Right the First Time: a Practical
Handbook on High Speed PCB and System Design”,Speeding Edge,2003

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3
Average 2.8 2.4 1.6 1.5 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3

182
EC23026 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENT 9

Measurement System – Instrumentation – Characteristics of measurement systems – Static and Dynamic

– Errors in Measurements – Calibration and Standards

UNIT II TRANSDUCERS 9

Classification of Transducers – Variable Resistive transducers – Strain gauges , Thermistor, RTD-

Variable Inductive transducers- LVDT, RVDT,-Variable Capacitive Transducers–Capacitor microphone-
Photoelectric transducers–Piezoelectric transducers–Thermocouple-IC sensors-Fibre optic sensors –
Smart/intelligent sensors.

UNIT III SIGNAL CONDITIONING AND SIGNAL ANALYZERS 9

DC and AC bridges – Wheatstone, Kelvin, Maxwell, Hay and Schering. Pre- amplifier – Isolation amplifier
– Filters – Data acquisition systems. Spectrum Analyzers – Wave analyzers – Logic analyzers

UNIT IV DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS 9

Digital Voltmeters– Millimeters – automation in Voltmeter–Accuracy and Resolution in DVM-Guarding

techniques–Frequency counter-Data Loggers–Introduction to IEEE488/GPIB Buses

UNIT V DATADISPLAYRECORDINGAND SYSTEMS 9

Dual trace CRO–Digital storage and Analog storage [Link] and Digital Recorders and
printers. Virtual Instrumentation - Block diagram and architecture – Applications in various
[Link] systems applied to Micro and Nanotechnology
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Discuss about the principles of various measurement techniques.

CO2: Analyze thetransducersanditsimpact.

CO3: Explain about the signal conditioning system and signal analyzers.

CO4: Illustrate the digital measurement equipments.

CO5: Emphasize the need for data acquisition, recording and display systems.

183
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Albert [Link] and William [Link],"Modern Electronic Instrumentation and

Measurement Techniques",Prentice Hall of India,2008.

2. ErnestoDoebelin and DhaneshN Manik,"Measurement Systems",McGraw-Hill, 5thEdition,

2007.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO4 2 2 3
CO5 1 2 2 3
Average 1 1.6 2.6 3 3 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2

184
EC23027 SOFT COMPUTING L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I FUZZY SET THEORY 9

Introduction to Neuro- Fuzzy and Soft Computing - Fuzzy Sets – Basic Definition and Terminology - Set-
theoretic Operations - Member Function Formulation and Parameterization -Fuzzy Rules and Fuzzy
Reasoning - Extension Principle and Fuzzy Relations - Fuzzy If –Then Rules - Fuzzy Reasoning - Fuzzy
Inference Systems - Mamdani Fuzzy Models - Sugeno Fuzzy Models –Tsukamoto Fuzzy Models –Input
Space Partitioning and Fuzzy Modeling.

UNIT II OPTIMIZATION 9

Derivative based Optimization - Descent Methods - The Method of Steepest Descent – Classical Newton‘s
Method – Step Size Determination - Derivative-free Optimization –Genetic Algorithms –Simulated
Annealing –Random Search – Downhill Simplex Search.

UNIT III NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Supervised Learning Neural Networks – Perceptrons – Adaline – Back propagation Mutilayer Perceptrons
– Radial Basis Function Networks – Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks - Competitive Learning
Networks - Kohonen Self-Organizing Networks – Learning Vector Quantization -Hebbian Learning.

UNIT IV NEURO FUZZY MODELING 9

Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems - Architecture - Hybrid Learning Algorithm – Learning Methods
that Cross-fertilize ANFIS and RBFN - Coactive Neuro Fuzzy Modeling –Neuro Fuzzy Spectrum.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE 9

Printed Character Recognition – Inverse Kinematics Problems – Automobile Fuel Efficiency Prediction –
Soft Computing for Color Recipe Prediction.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Use fuzzy logic rules and models

CO2: Apply various optimization schemes

CO3: Design and implement various neural networks

CO4: Discuss hybrid soft computing

CO5: Develop different soft computing frame works for Engineering applications

TEXT BOOKS:

185
 1. [Link], C.T. Sunand [Link], "Neuro Fuzzy and Soft Computing", Pearson
Education,2015

2. [Link],"Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Systems", Oxford University Press,2005

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. [Link], "Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications",McGraw-Hill,3ed., 2011.

2. Davis E. Goldberg, "Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning,

Addison Wesley,N.Y.,1989.

3. [Link] and [Link], "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms",
PHI,2013.

4. [Link],[Link] and [Link], "Computational Intelligence-PCTools",Academic Press

Professional,Boston,1996.

5. [Link] and [Link], "Principles of Soft Computing",Wiley India, 3 rd Edition,

2018.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
Average 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1

186
EC23C20 BIO-INSPIRED COMPUTING L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION & GENETIC ALGORITHM 9

Evolutionary Computation (EC),Features of EC, Genetic Algorithms, Crossover and Mutation

Operators, Selection Mechanism – Fitness Proportionate- Ranking and Tournament selection-
Building Block – Hypothesis and Schema Theorem- Applications.

UNIT II ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION 9

Ant Colony Optimization - From real to artificial ants, ACO Algorithm, ACO and model based search, ACO
Pheromone Updation and Evaporation, Applications.

UNIT III PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION 9

Particle Swarm Optimization-Anatomy of a Particle, Velocity and Position Updation, PSO topologies,
Control Parameters, Applications

UNIT IV MULTI-OBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9

Multi-Objective Optimization- Ranking and Diversity, Classical Multi-Objective Optimization Methods,

Non-Dominated Genetic Algorithm, Strength Pareto Evolutionary algorithm, Performance assessment
of Multi-Objective EC Techniques

UNIT V RECENT ADVANCES IN SWARM INTELLIGENCE TECHNIQUES 9

Grey-Wolf Optimization- Crow Search Optimization, Salp Swarm Algorithm, Case Studies on Hybrid
Optimization Methods for Neural Networks Evolution for real-world application.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Ability to implement and apply genetic algorithms

CO2: Ability to build and apply ANT colony optimization technique

CO3: Ability to implement and apply particle swarm optimization algorithm

CO4: Ability to implement and apply multi-objective optimization methods

CO5: Ability to apply hybrid optimization in the Neural Network Models for real-world applications

TEXT BOOKS:

1.1. David [Link], “Genetic Algorithms in search, Optimization & Machine Learning”,
Pearson Education,2006
2.2. Kenneth A De Jong, “Evolutionary Computation A Unified Approach”, Prentice Hall of India,

187
 New Delhi,2006.
3.3. Xin Xin-She Yang, “Recent Advances in Swarm Intelligence and Evolutionary Computation”,
Springer International Publishing, Switzerland, 2015.
4.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.5. Marco Dorigo and Thomas Stutzle, “Ant Colony optimization”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2004
2.6. N P Padhy, “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Systems”,Oxford University Press, 2005.

3. Engel brecht, A.P., “Fundamentals of Computational Swarm Intelligence” ,Wiley,2005.

7.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 3 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
Average 3 2.8 2.2 3 1 1 1

188
EC23028 PATTERN RECOGNITION L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I FEATURE EXTRACTION AND TRANSFORMATION

9

Introduction - Features, Feature vectors - Feature selection and ranking - Singular value
decomposition – Karhunen Loeve Transformation - Feature Selection through Functions
Approximation - Binary Feature Selection -Case studies on features obtained from speech and
audio signals.

UNIT II DIMENSIONALITY REDUCTION 9

Discriminant functions - Fisher’s Discriminant analysis - Principal Component Analysis - Kernel

PCA - Independent component analysis.

UNIT III LEARNING MODELS 9

Linear models for Classification - Classifiers based on Bayes Decision theory – Naïve Bayes
- Nearest neighbor rules - Mixture models - Mixture of Gaussian - Hidden Markov Models -
Maximum Likelihood for the Hidden Markov Model.

UNIT IV CLUSTERING 9

Clustering Concept - Hierarchical Clustering Procedures - Partitional Clustering - Clustering of

Large Data Sets - EM Algorithm - Grid Based Clustering - Density Based Clustering.

UNIT V RECENT ADVANCES IN PATTERN RECOGNITION

9

Fuzzy Logic - Fuzzy inference systems - fuzzy decision making - Neuro - fuzzy techniques, Deep
Learning techniques - CNN and transfer learning models - Case studies on character recognition
- Face recognition - Fingerprint identification using intelligent techniques.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Extract features and select relevant information

CO2: Apply appropriate dimensionality reduction methods

CO3: Design and implement learning models

CO4: Analyze and Work on different clustering algorithms

CO5: Apply pattern recognition techniques for different kinds of applications

189
TEXT BOOKS:

1. R.O. Duda, P.E. Hart and D.G. Stork, "Pattern Classification" John Wiley, 2021.

2. Christopher M. Bishop, " Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning", Springer

2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. [Link], "Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw-Hill,3ed., 2011.

2. Dr.S.N. Sivanandam and S.N. Deepa,"Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley,3 rd Edition,
2018.
3. M. Narasimha Murthy, V. Susheela Devi, “Pattern Recognition”, Universities Press, 2011.
4. Menahem Friedman, Abraham Kandel, “Introduction to Pattern Recognition Statistical,
Structural, Neural and Fuzzy Logic Approaches”, World Scientific publishing Co. Ltd,
2020
5. S. Theodoridis, K. Koutroumbas, “Pattern Recognition”, Fourth Edition, Academic Press,
2009.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 1 1
Average 3 3 2 3 2 1 1

190
EC23C16 INTRODUCTION TO MEMS AND NEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEMS AND NEMS 9

MEMS, Microsystem and microelectronics, Applications of MEMS, Materials for MEMS: Silicon, silicon
compounds, polymers, metals. Introduction to NEMS, Nano scaling, classification of nano structured
materials, Applications of nanomaterials.

UNIT II FABRICATION OF MEMS AND NEMS 9

Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation. Thin film depositions: LPCVD, Sputtering,
Evaporation, Electroplating; Etching techniques: Dry and wet etching; Micromachining: Bulk
Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, LIGA.

UNIT III MICRO AND NANO SENSORS 9

Acoustic sensor – Quartz crystal microbalance, Surface acoustic wave, Flexural plate wave, shear
horizontal; Vibratory gyroscope, Pressure sensors, Quantum well infrared photodetectors

UNIT IV MICRO AND NANO ACTUATORS 9

Electrostatic actuators, piezoelectric actuators, Thermal actuators, Actuators using shape memory
alloys, Microgrippers, Micromotors, Microvalves, Micropumps

UNIT V PACKAGING AND CHARACTERIZATION OF MEMS AND NEMS 9

Micro / nano systems packaging, Essential packaging technologies, Selection of packaging materials;
Nano material characterization - SEM, TEM, AFM, STM.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Familiarize the basics of micro/nano electromechanical structures, devices and systems
including their theoretical foundations, applications and advantages
CO2: Recognize the use of materials in micro/nano fabrication and describe the fabrication
processes including surface micromachining, bulk micromachining and LIGA
CO3: Analyze the key performance aspects of micro/nano electromechanical transducers
including sensors
CO4: Analyze the key performance aspects of micro/nano electromechanical transducers
including actuators
CO5: Explore the techniques for characterization and packaging requirements of
MEMS/NEMS

191
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ran Hsu, MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2002.

2. Murty B.S, Shankar P, Raj B, Rath, B.B, Murday J, Textbook of Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology, Springer publishing, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, Devices, and Structures”, CRC
Press, 2002

2. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson education India limited, 2006

3. Vinod Kumar Khanna, “Nanosensors: Physical, Chemical, and Biological”, CRC press,
2012.

4. Mahalik N P, MEMS, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.

5. Manouchehr E Motamedi, “MOEMS: Micro-Opto-Electro-Mechanical Systems”, SPIE

press, First Edition, 2005.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 1 1
Average 3 3 2 1.4 1 1 1

EC23029 SENSORS, ACTUATORS AND INTERFACE ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

192
UNIT I STRAIN, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS 9

Introduction, Stress & Pressure sensors: Resistance strain gauge, piezoelectric strain gauge. Fiber-
optic sensor, Pressure gauges. Temperature Sensors: Bimetallic strip, thermocouples, Resistance
thermometers, thermistors, bolometer, Pyroelectric detector.

UNIT II MOTION SENSORS 9

Capacitor plate sensor, Inductive sensors, LVDT Accelerometer systems, rotation sensors drag cup
devices, piezoelectric devices, Rotary encoders.

UNIT III OPTICAL SENSORS 9

Color temperature, light flux, photo sensors, photomultiplier, photo resistor and photoconductors,
photodiodes, phototransistors, photovoltaic devices, fiber optic sensors, electro optic sensors & fiber-
optic applications, light transducer, solid-state transducers and liquid crystal devices.

UNIT IV ACTUATORS 9

Relays, Solenoid drive, Stepper Motors, Voice-Coil actuators, Hydraulic actuators – Variable
transformers: synchros, resolvers, Inductosyn

UNIT V INTERFACING ELECTRONIC SENSORS 9

Proximity detectors – Inductive and capacitive, ultrasonic, photo beam detectors Reed switch, smoke
sensors. Direct Sensor-Microcontroller Interfacing, intelligent sensors.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Select sensors for the measurement of physical variables for real time applications

CO2: Use sensors for motion sensing applications

CO3: Use sensors for optoelectronic applications

CO4: Understand and apply actuators for engineering applications

CO5: Interface different sensors for engineering applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin E O, “Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition,
2004.
2. Ian R Sinclair, “Sensors and Transducers”, Newnes publishers, Third Edition, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

193
 1. Ramon Pallás Areny, John G. Webster, “Sensors and Signal conditioning”, John Wiley and
Sons, Second Edition, 2000.
2. Jack P Holman, “Experimental Methods for Engineers”, McGraw Hill, USA, Seventh Edition,
2001.
3. Patranabis D, “Sensors and Transducers”, Tata McGraw Hill, Seventh Edition, 2003.
4. Jon Wilson, “Sensor Technology Handbook”, Newnes, First Edition, 2004.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
Average 3 3 2.8 1.4 1 1 1 1

194
EC23C01 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9

Principle of Wireless Sensor Network-Introduction to wireless sensor networks-

Challenges,Comparison with ad hoc network, Node architecture and Network architecture,
design principles,Service interfaces, Gateway, Short range radio communication standards-
IEEE 802.15.4, Zigbee and [Link] layer and transceiver design considerations.

UNIT II MAC AND ROUTING PROTOCOLS 9

MAC protocols – fundamentals, low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts, contention and
Schedule-based protocols - SMAC, BMAC,TRAMA, Routing protocols – Requirements,
Classification-SPIN, Directed Diffusion, COUGAR, ACQUIRE, LEACH, PEGASIS.

UNIT III 6LOWPAN 9

6LoWPAN Architecture - protocol stack, Adaptation Layer, Link layers – Addressing, Routing -
Mesh- Under - Route-Over, Header Compression - Stateless header compression - Context-
based header compression, Fragmentation and Reassembly , Mobility – types, Mobile IPv6,
Proxy Home Agent, Proxy MIPv6, NEMO –Routing – MANET, ROLL, Border routing.

UNIT IV APPLICATION 9

Design Issues, Protocol Paradigms – End-to-end, Real-time streaming and sessions,

Publish/subscribe, Web service paradigms, Common Protocols -Web service protocols, MQ
telemetry transport for sensor networks (MQTT-S), ZigBee compact application protocol (CAP),
Service discovery, Simple network management protocol (SNMP), Real-time transport and
sessions, Industry- Specific protocols.

UNIT V TOOLS 9

TinyOS – Introduction, NesC, Interfaces, modules, configuration, Programming in TinyOS using

NesC, TOSSIM, Contiki – Structure, Communication Stack, Simulation environment – Cooja
simulator, Programming
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Design solutions for WSNs applications

CO2: Develop efficient MAC and Routing Protocols

CO3: Develop solutions for 6LOWPAN applications

195
 CO4: Develop efficient layered protocols in 6LOWPAN

CO5: UseTinyOS and ContikiOS in WSNs and 6LOWPAN applications

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Holger Karl ,Andreaswillig,“Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”,

John Wiley Publication,2006.

2. Anna Forster,“Introduction to Wireless Sensor Networks”,Wiley,2017.

3. ZachShelbySensinode and Carsten Bormann,“6LoWPAN:The Wireless Embedded

Internet” John Wiley and Sons, Ltd, Publication,2009.

4. Philip Levis,“TinyOS Programming”,2006–[Link].

5. The Contiki Operating [Link]://[Link]/contiki.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO5 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 2
Average 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2

196
EC23030 FIBER OPTIC SENSORS L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I OPTICAL MODULATORS, FABRY-PEROT 10

INTERFEROMETER AND MAGNETIC SENSORS

Introduction-Electrooptic effect-Bulk modulators-Integrated optical modulators-All-fiber optical

modulators - Intensity based and Fabry perot interferometer sensors: Intensity sensors – Band edge
temperature sensors-Encoder-based position sensors-Multimode fabry-perot sensors -Single-mode
fabry-perot sensors-Magnetic Sensors: Faraday effect sensors–Magnetostrictive sensors –Lorentz
force sensors.

UNIT II GRATING SENSORS 10

Introduction - Theoretical background - Sensors based on relative movement of opposed gratings -

Sensors based on grating period modulation - Development status of sensors - Fiber optic grating-
Introduction-Fabrication of fiber grating sensors-Single-parameter fiber bragg gratings –Multi parameter
fiber grating strain sensors-Applications of multi parameter fiber bragg gratings- Multi parameter
pressure and Temperature sensing-Very high speed position and velocity sensing.

UNIT III POLARIZATION,MACH-ZEHNDER AND MICHELSON 9

INTERFEROMETERSENSORS

Introduction-Theoretical background of polarization sensors-Sensors based on the photoelastic effect-

Sensors based on retardation plates-principle of operation of Mach-Zehnder interferometer-Fiber
interferometer rconfigurations –Applications of interferometer sensors.

UNIT IV DISTRIBUTED FIBER OPTIC SENSORS, ROTATIONAL 8

SENSORS ANDFIBEROPTIC SMARTSTRUCTURES

Introduction - Distributed sensing - Basic principles of sensor multiplexing – Interferometric sensor

multiplexing - Fiber Optic Sensors Based on the Sagnac Interferometer and Passive Ring Resonator –
Fiber optic sensor systems.

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONSANDFIBER OPTIC 8

BIOSENSORS

Introduction-Background-Temperature measurement-Pressure measurement-Fluid-level

measurement - Flow measurement - Position measurement - Vibration measurement – Chemical
analysis-Current-voltage measurement-Important issues for industrial application-Biosensors.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to understand optical principles underlying various optical sensing methods

197
 CO2: Ability to comprehend the various modes of modulation of optical signals for sensing
CO3: Ability to understand the different optical sensing technique.
CO4: Ability to understand the sensor multiplexing techniques.
CO5: Ability to understand the application of optical biosensors in different domains.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. David A. Krohn, Trevor W. MacDougall and Alexis Mendez, "Fiber optic Sensors:
Fundamental and Applications", SPIE, Fourth Edition, 2015
2. Eric Uddand William B. Spillman, Jr., "Fiber optics sensors: An introduction for Engineers
and scientists", John Wiley & Sons, Second Edition, 2011
3. Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communications", Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2013.
4. José Miguel López-Higuera, "Handbook of Optical Fibre Sensing Technology", John
Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2002
5. Zujie Fang, Ken Chin, Ronghui Qu, Haiwen Cai, Kai Chang, "Fundamentals of Optical
Fiber Sensors", John Wiley &Sons Inc, 2012

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO5 2 3 3 1 1 1
Average 2.5 2.5 1.8 1 1 1

198
EC23C09 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
UNIT I BIOPOTENTIAL ELECTRODES

Origin of biopotential and its [Link]-electrolyte interface, electrode–skin

interface,Hall-cell potential, Polarizable [Link] of electrodes-surface,needle
and micro electrodes and their equivalent circuits.

UNIT II BIOPOTENTIAL MEASUREMENT

Biosignal characteristics–frequency and amplitude ranges. ECG –Einthoven‘s triangle,

standard 12 lead system EEG10-20 electrode system,unipolar,bipolar and average
mode EMG –Functional block diagram.

UNIT III BIOPOTENTIAL AMPLIFIER

Need for bio-amplifier-single ended bio-amplifier,differential bio-amplifier–right leg driven
ECG amplifier, isolation-isolated DC amplifier and AC carrier [Link] and
removal.

UNIT IV NON ELECTRICAL PHYSIOLOGICAL PARAMETER

MEASUREMENT
Temperature, respiration rate and pulse rate measurements, Plethys mography,Pulse
oximetry, Blood Pressure:detector circuit, indirect methods - auscultatory method,
oscillometric method, ultrasonic method. Blood flow and Cardiac output measurement-
Indicator dilution, dye dilution and thermos dilution method.

UNITV BIOCHEMICAL MEASUREMENT

Biochemical sensors - pH, pO2 and pCO2, Ion selective Field Effect Transistor
(ISFET), Immunologically Sensitive Field Effect Transistor (IMFET), colorimeter,
flame photometer, spectrophotometer, blood cell counter, auto analyzer

COURSEOUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 Understand the electrode behavior and circuit models.
CO2 Analyze the bio signal recordings.
CO3 Design various bio amplifiers.
CO4 Acquire research knowledge to work with bio signals
CO5 Understand the concept of biosensors.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. [Link],“Introduction to Biomedical equipment
technology”,PearsonEducation, 4th Edition, 2004.
2. [Link],“Medical Instrumentation Application and
Design”,JohnWileyandSons,NewYork, 4th Edition, 2009.

199
REFERENCES:
1. KhandpurR.S,“Handbook of Biomedical
Instrumentation”,TataMcGrawHill,NewDelhi,3rdEdition,2014.
2. [Link],“Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation”,John
WileyandSons,3rd Edition, Reprint 2008.

COURSE PROGRAMMEOUTCOMES
OUTCOMES PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
Avg 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1

200
EC23C07 BIOMEDICAL ASSIST DEVICES L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNITI CARDIAC AND NEUROLOGICAL EQUIPMENT 10

Electrocardiograph, Cardiac Pacemaker- Internal and External Pacemaker, types, Batteries.

AC and DCDefibrillator- Internal and External, types, Precautions. Patient monitoring systems,
Radio Telemetry(single,multi). Clinical significance of EEG, Multi-channel EEG recording
system and applications, Evoked Potential–Visual,Auditory and Somatosensory.

UNIT II DIATHERMY 9

IR and UV lamp - application. Need for different diathermy units, Short wave diathermy,
ultrasonicdiathermy, Microwave diathermy. Electro surgery machine - Current waveforms,
Tissue Responses,Electro surgicall current level,Hazards and safety procedures

UNIT III ASSIST DEVICES 9

Heart Lung Machine- Condition to be satisfied by the H/LSystem. Different types of

Oxygenators, Pumps,Pulsatile and Continuous Types, Monitoring Process. Hemodialyser
– Indication and principle of hemodialysers, Monitoring Systems, Wearable Artificial
Kidney, Implanting Type. Types of Ventilators –Pressure, Volume, and Time controlled.
Flow, Patient Cycle Ventilators, Humidifiers, Nebulizers,Inhalators.

UNIT IV RESPIRATORY MEASUREMENT 8

Lung Volume and vital capacity, Spirometer, measurements of residual volume. Pneumo
tachometer –Airway resistance measurement, Whole body plethysmography. Intra- Alveolar
and Thoracic pressure measurements, Apnea Monitor.

UNITV PATIENT SAFETY 9

Physiological effects of electricity – important susceptibility parameters – Macro shock,

Micro shockhazards, Patient’s electrical environment, GFI units, Earthing Schemes.
Electrical safety codes and standards, Basic Approaches to protection against
shock,Protection equipment design,Electrical safety analyzer–Testing the Electrical safety of
medical equipment,Biomedical Laser Safety
TOTAL:45PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to
CO1: Describe the working and recording setup of cardiac and neurological equipment.
CO2: Explain about measurements of parameters related to the respiratory system.
CO3: Design and demonstrate the therapeutic effects of diathermy
CO4: Demonstrate the function of assist devices.
CO5: Test the electrical safety of medical equipment in the hospital lenvironment.

201
TEXTBOOKS:
1. [Link],“Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”,Wiley
[Link],New Delhi,4thedition,2015.
2. [Link],“Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”,Pearson education, 2012.

REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. MyerKutz,Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering and Design,McGraw
Hill,2003.
2. [Link], “Principles of Applied Biomedical
Instrumentation”,3rdEdition,2008.
3. LeslieCromwell,“Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”,PrenticeHallof
India,
NewDelhi,2ndedition,2015.
4. [Link],“Biomedical Device Technology,Principles and
design”,CharlesThomas PublisherLtd,Illinois,USA, 2008.

ARTICULATIONMATRIX:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1
Average 3 2 2.2 2 1.8 2.8 1.6 1.2 1 1

202
BM23C02 RADIOLOGICAL EQUIPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNITI MEDICAL X-RAY EQUIPMENT 10

Physics of Radiography. Nature of X-rays, X-Ray absorption – Tissue contrast. X- Ray

Equipment (BlockDiagram) – X-Ray Tube, collimator, Bucky Grid, power supply. Digital
Radiography- Computed radiography, CCD-Based, TFTs based and CMOS based Digita
lRadiography Systems. Fluoroscopy-X-ray Image Intensifier tubes – Digital Fluoroscopy.
Angiography - cine Angiography, Digital [Link].

UNIT II COMPUTED TOMOGRAPHY 8

Principles of tomography, CT Generations - X- Ray sources, collimation, X- Ray detectors,

Viewing systems, CT Numbers, Imaging Artifacts,spiral CT scanning, ultra-fast CT
[Link] reconstruction techniques-backprojection, iterative method and Fourier slice
Theorem.

UNIT III MAGNETIC RESONANCE IMAGING 9

Fundamentals of magnetic resonance-Interaction of Nuclei with static magnetic field and Radio
frequency wave,rotation and [Link] of magnetic resonance signals–bulk
Magnetization,Relaxation processesT1andT2,Spinecho,MR image acquisition,Imaging
parameters-TE,TR and image contrast,Slice selection, frequency encoding and phase
encoding. Block Diagram approach of MRI system-system Magnet (Permanent,
Electromagnet and Super conductors), Gradient magnetic fields, Radio Frequency coils
(sending and receiving),shim coils,Electronic [Link].

UNIT IV NUCLEAR IMAGING SYSTEM 9

Radioactivity-Radioactivity decay law,Radio Isotopes-alpha,beta,and gamma [Link]

pharmaceuticals. Radiation detectors – gas filled, ionization chambers, proportional counter,
GMcounter and scintillation Detectors. Gamma camera- Principle of operation, collimator,
photo multipliertube,X-Ypositioning circuit,pulse height [Link] of SPECTandPET.

UNITV RADIATION THERAPY AND RADIATION SAFETY 9

Effects of radiation- direct and indirect. Radiation therapy – linear accelerator, Tele gamma
[Link] Techniques in radiation therapy - Stereotaxic Radiosurgery, Stereotaxic
Radiotherapy, Protonbeam therapy, 3D CRT, IMRT, IGRT and Cyber knife. Radiation
measuring Instruments-Dosimeter, film Badges, Thermo Luminescent dosimeters-electronic
[Link] protection in medicine-
Radiation protection principles, ICRP,AERB.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS

203
 COURSEOUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the physics of different diagnostic medical imaging techniques.
CO2: Demonstrate the Instrumentation behind the medical imaging equipment.
CO3: Understand and apply the image reconstruction methods for image
formation.
CO4: Discuss the principle and operation of various types of radiation detectors
CO5: Understand the concepts of various radiation therapy equipment.
CO6: Demonstrate the effects of radiation, radiation safety and protection methods.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. SteveWebb,“The Physics of Medical Imaging’’, Adam Hilger,Philadelpia,1988.
2. [Link] and Jonathan [Link],Medical Imaging Signals and Systems
Pearson Education Inc.2014.
3. [Link],[Link] Seibert,[Link],Jr,[Link]. The
Essential Physics of Medical Imaging’’, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 3rd Edition,
2012.

REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Gopal B. Saha, “Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine’’,
Springer, 3 rd Edition2006.
2. [Link], PV Lawford, RH Smallwood, DR Hose, DC Barber,“Medical
physics and Biomedical Engineering’’,-CRCPress,1999.
3. MyerKutz,“Standard hand book of Biomedical Engineering and design”, McGrawHill,
2003.
4. [Link], “Magnetic Resonance Imaging and Spectroscopy in Medicine
concepts and Techniques’’,Orient Longman,2007.
5. [Link] and RussellRitenour,“Medical Imaging Physics”,William,Wiley-
Liss,4th Edition,2002

ARTICULATIONMATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 1
CO4 3 1 1
CO5 3 1
CO6 - 1 1 1 1 2 1
Average 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

204
EC23C08 BRAIN COMPUTER INTERFACE AND ITS L T P C
APPLICATIONS
3 0 0 3

UNITI INTRODUCTIONTO BCI 9

Brain Computer Interface system, Classification of BCI-Dependent, Independent, Hybrid BCI,
Invasive, Non-invasive and Partially invasive BCI, Synchronous and Asynchronous BCI,
Neuronal Activity in braincortex.
UNIT II SOURCES FOR BCI 9

EEG signal acquisition – Signal Preprocessing – Artifacts removal, MEG, Signals reflecting
brain metabolic activity- PET, fNIRS, fMRI. EEG-Event related potential- P300, Mu band,
Sensory Motor Rhythm- Event Related Desynchronization, Event related synchronization,
Motor Imagery signals, Visual Evoked potential, Steady state Visual Evoked potential, Slow
cortical potential.

UNIT III FEATURE EXTRACTION 9

Power spectral density,Band power, Wavelet features,Spatial filters-Common Average

Reference Filter, Laplacian filter, Common Spatial Pattern, PCA and ICA.

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION 9

Linear Discriminant Analysis, k Nearest Neighbor classifier, Support Vector Machine,

Regression, Deep Neural networks-Transferlearning, Convolution Neural Network.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF BCI 9

Speller based on P300, Speller based on SSVEP, SSVEP based wheel chair control, Motor
imagery based control of Exoskeleton, Neuro rehabilitation, Gaming, Neuromarketing, Case
studies on Applications of BCI.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the student will be able to

CO1: Acquire and analyse the brain signal from different regions of brain cortex for
specific BCI Application
CO2: Apply suitable preprocessing technique to the brain signal
CO3: Analyze the event related potentials
CO4: Extract discriminant features from brain signals
CO5: Classify and derive the control signals for BCI applications
CO6: Design a BCI system for various applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jonathan Wolpaw, Elizabeth Winter Wolpaw, “Brain Computer
Interfaces:Principles and Practice”,Oxford University Press, 2012.
2. [Link], “EEGPrimer”, Elsevier Biomedical Press,1999.

205
 3. Bernhard Graimann, Brendan Allison, GertPfurtscheller, “Brain-Computer
Interfaces: Revolutionizing Human –Computer Interaction”,Springer,2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Arnon Cohen,” Biomedical signal processing Vol 1 Time and Frequency Domain
Analysis”,CRC Press, 1986.
2. Arnon Cohen, “Biomedical Signal Processing Vol 2: Compression and
automatic recognition”,CRC PressInc.,2021.
3. Bishop C.M., “Neural Networks for Pattern Recognition”,Oxford,Clarendon Press, 1995.

ARTICULATIONMATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 1 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 1
CO6 3 3 3 1 1 2 1
Average 3 3 3 1 1 2 1

206
EC23C18 SOFT COMPUTING AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I FUZZY SET THEORY 10

Introduction to Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing - Fuzzy Sets - Basic Definition and
Terminology - Set-theoretic Operations - Member Function Formulation and Parameterization
- Fuzzy Rules and FuzzyReasoning - Extension Principle and Fuzzy Relations - Fuzzy If -
Then Rules - Fuzzy Reasoning – Fuzzy Inference Systems-Mamdani Fuzzy Models-Sugeno
Fuzzy Models-Tsukamoto Fuzzy Models.

UNIT II OPTIMIZATION 8

Derivative based Optimization-Descent Methods-The Method of Steepest Descent-Classical

Newton‘s Method - Step Size Determination - Derivative free Optimization -Genetic
Algorithms – Simulated Annealing-Random Search-Downhill Simplex Search.

UNIT III ROUGH SETS 9

Rough sets - Rough set theory - Set approximation - Rough membership - Attributes-
Dependency of attributes - Rough equivalence - Reducts - Rough Reducts based on SVM -
Hybrid set systems – Fuzzy rough sets.

UNIT IV HYBRID TECHNIQUES 9

ANN concepts- Adaptive Neuro- Fuzzy Inference Systems- Architecture-Hybrid Learning

Algorithm –Coactive Neuro Fuzzy Modeling- Neuro- Fuzzy Spectrum- Neuro- Fuzzy-GA
systems and case studies.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE

9

Neural networks for facial and emotion recognition-Detection of brain disorders-Study of

cardiac conditions-Soft Computing for detection of Chest disorders.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course,the student should be able to:
CO1: Work on fuzzy logic and design inference systems
CO2: Apply various derivative and non-derivative optimization schemes
CO3: Understand concepts related torough sets
CO4: Discuss hybrid soft computing with case studies
CO5: Develop different soft computing frameworks for Engineering applications

207
TEXT BOOKS:
1. [Link],[Link] [Link],"Neuro Fuzzy and Soft
Computing",Pearson Education,2015.
2. [Link],"Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Systems",Oxford University
Press,2005.
3. [Link],"Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications",McGraw-Hill, 3rd
ed.,2011.
4. Davis [Link],"Genetic Algorithms:Search,Optimization and
Machine Learning, Addison Wesley,N.Y.,1989.
5. [Link] and [Link],"Neural Networks,Fuzzy Logic and
Genetic Algorithms",PHI, 2013.
6. [Link],[Link] and [Link],"Computational Intelligence-PC
Tools", Academic Press Professional, Boston,1996.
7. [Link] and [Link],"Principles of Soft
Computing",Wiley India,3rd Edition,2018.
8. Vladik Kreinovich and Nguyen Hoang Phuong,“Soft Computing for
Biomedical Applications and Related Topics”, Springer, 2021

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
CO1 - 3 3 - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 - 3 - 1 1 1
CO3 - 3 3 - - 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 1 1 1
CO5 3 - 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
Averag 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
e

208
EC23031 MEDICAL IMAGE ANALYSIS LTPC
3003
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING 9
Image perception, MTF of the visual system, Image fidelity criteria, Image model, Image
sampling and quantization – two-dimensional sampling theory, Image quantization,
Optimum mean square quantizer, Image transforms–2D-DFTandothertransforms.
UNIT II BIO-MEDICAL IMAGE PREPROCESSING 9
Image Enhancement operations–Image noise and modeling, Image restoration–Image
degradation model, Inverse and Wiener filtering, Geometric transformations and correction.
Case studies on Denoising in Medical images

UNIT III MEDICAL IMAGE RECONSTRUCTION 9

Mathematical preliminaries and basic reconstruction methods, Image reconstruction in CT
scanners, MRI, fMRI, Ultrasound imaging. 3D Ultrasound imaging, Nuclear Medical Imaging
modalities–SPECT, PET, Molecular Imaging.
UNIT IV MACHINE LEARNING BASED APPROACHES FOR SEGMENTATION AND
CLASSIFICATION 9

Decision Trees for Segmentation and Classification - Random Forests for Segmentation and
Classification - Neural Networks for Segmentation and Classification - Deep Learning for
Medical Image Analysis
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9
Recent advances in analysis of Retinal Vessel Segmentation, CT - Vessel Segmentation of
Lung Images, Tissue Characterization in Ultrasound

TOTAL PERIODS: 45 HOURS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

On completion of this course the student will be able to:

CO1: Apply and Perform Image Processing technique for Denoising, Enhancement
and Restoration of Medical Images

CO2: Apply reconstruction techniques in medical images

CO3: Perform and Validate Segmentation Algorithm, Feature Extraction for Medical
Images

CO4: Understand the Classification technique and perform classification in medical

images using Machine learning techniques

CO5: Implement and validate Image registration algorithm and Fusion techniques
in Medical Images

CO6: Apply 3D Visualization techniques in Medical Images

209
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Atam P. Dhawan, “Medical Image Analysis”, 2nd Edition, Wiley – IEEE Press,
2011.
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”,
4thEdition, Pearson Education, 2018.
3. Jerry L. Prince and Jonathan M. Links, “Medical Imaging Signals and Systems”,
2nd Edition,Pearson Education, 2014.

REFERENCES:

1. Anil K Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”,1st Edition, Pearson

Education India, 2015.
2. Geoff Dougherty, “Digital Image Processing for Medical Applications”, South
Asian Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
3. Ravikanth Malladi, “Geometric Methods in Bio-Medical Image Processing
(Mathematics and Visualization)”, 1st Edition, Springer, 2002.
4. Ardeshir Goshtasby, “Image Registration Principles, Tools and Methods
(Advances in Computer Vision and Pattern Recognition)”, Springer, 2014.

CO- PO Outcome:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 1

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CO5 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2

CO6 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1

210
EC23032 INTRODUCTION TO BIOMIMICRY LTPC
3003

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMIMICRY 9

Definition and historical context of biomimicry - Importance and potential impact of biomimetic
approaches - Case studies of successful biomimetic designs.

UNIT II PRINCIPLES OF BIOMIMICRY 9

Core principles: emulate, adapt, and integrate - Biological systems as models for innovation
and problem-solving - Ethics and sustainability considerations in biomimicry.

UNIT III BIOLOGICAL INSPIRATION 9

Structure-function relationships in biological organisms - Evolutionary biology and adaptation

- Biomimetic materials and structures - Nature's energy and resource management strategies
- Case studies of biomimetic materials and processes

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF BIOMIMICRY 9

Biomimetic materials and their properties - Bio-inspired robotics and engineering designs -
Biomimicry in architecture, design, and urban planning

UNIT V FUTURE DIRECTIONS AND CHALLENGES 9

Emerging trends and technologies in biomimicry - Challenges and limitations of biomimetic

approaches - Biomimicry and emerging technologies - Challenges and opportunities in
biomimicry - The future of biomimicry.

TOTAL PERIODS: 45 HOURS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course the student will be able to:

CO1:Explain the Core Principles Of Biomimicry

CO2:Identify Biomimetic Examples
CO3:Apply the Biomimicry Process
CO4:Develop Critical Thinking and Problem-Solving Skills
CO5:Gain a Deeper Appreciation for Nature

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Tercek and Jonathan Adams, “Nature’s Fortune: How Business and
Society Thrive by Investing in Nature" ISBN – 13 978-0465031818, Edition
1, 2013.

2. Michael Pawlyn, “Biomimicry in Architecture", ISBN – 13 978-1859466285,

Edition 2, 2016.

REFERENCES:

211
 1. Biomimicry and Business: How Companies Are Using Nature's Strategies to
Succeed - Margo Farnsworth ISBN – 13 978- 0367552596, Edition 1, 2020.
2. Biomimicry - Innovation Inspired by Nature - Janine M. Benyus, William
Morrow, An imprint of Harper Collins Publishers. [Link].
CO- PO OUTCOME:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2

CO2 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CO3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1

CO4 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CO5 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2

CO6 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1

212
 EC23008 INTRODUCTION TO SoC DESIGN L TP
C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I APPLICATION SPECIFIC INTEGRATED CIRCUIT 9

Overview of ASIC types, design strategies,CISC,RISC and NISC approaches for SoC,
architectural issues and its impact on SoC design methodologies, Application Specific
Instruction Processor (ASIP) concepts.

UNIT II NO INSTRUCTION SET COMPUTING 9

NISC Control Words methodology, NISC Applications & Advantages, Architecture

Description Languages (ADL) for design and verification of Application Specific Instruction
set Processors (ASIP), Use of Generic Netlist Representation-A formal language for
specification, compilation and synthesis of embedded processors.

UNIT III SIMULATION 9

Different simulation modes, behavioral, functional, statictiming, gatelevel, switchlevel,

transistor/circuit simulation, design of verification vectors, Low power FPGA, SoC related
modelling of data path design and control logic, Minimization of interconnects impact,
clock tree design issues.

UNIT IV LOW POWER SOC DESIGN/DIGITAL SYSTEM 9

Low power system perspective- power gating, clock gating, adaptive voltage scaling
(AVS), Static voltage scaling, Dynamic clock frequency and voltage scaling (DCFS),
building blocks for memory, power downt echniques, power consumption verification.

UNIT V SYNTHESIS 9

Technology independent and technology dependent approaches for synthesis,

optimization constraints, Synthesis report analysis, Single core and Multi core systems,
dark silicon issues, HDL coding techniques for minimization of power consumption, Fault
tolerant designs

TOTAL:45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Ability to identify & formulate a given problem in framework of SoC

Ability to understand NISC Architecture, ADL and ASIP

CO3: Ability to simulate SoC at various levels.

CO4: Ability to design low power SoC / Digital System

CO5: Ability to map the resources and optimize the system performance

213
 REFERENCES:

1. Hubert Kaeslin,“Digital Integrated Circuit Design:From VLSI Architectures

to CMOS Fabrication”,Cambridge University Press,2008.
2. B. AlHashimi, “System on chip-Next generation electronics”,The IET,2006.
3. Rochit Rajsuman,“System-on-a-chip: Design and test”, Advantest America
R&D Center, 2000.
4. PMishra and NDutt,“Processor DescriptionLanguages”,Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.
5. Michael [Link] and Wayne Luk,“Computer System Design: System-on-
Chip”, Wiley,2011.

ARTICULATION MATRIX

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
Average 1 1.8 1.6 1.7 1.4 1 1 1 1

214
215
EC23009 SPACE TIME WIRELESS COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
The crowded spectrum, need for high data rate, MIMO systems – Array Gain, Diversity Gain,
DataPipes, Spatial MUX, MIMO System Model. MIMO System Capacity – channel known at the
TX, Channel unknown to the TX–capacity of deterministic channels, Random channels and
frequency selective channels.

UNIT II RADIOWAVE PROPAGATION 9

Radiowave propagation–Macroscopic fading- free space and outdoor,small scale fading-Fading
measurements-Direct pulse measurements, spread spectrum correlation channel sounding,
frequency domain channel sounding,Antenna Diversity–Diversity combining methods.

UNIT III SPACE TIME BLOCKCODES (STBC) 9

Delay Diversity scheme, Alamouti space time code – Maximum likelihood decoding maximum
ratio combining. Transmit diversity space time block codes for real signal constellation and
complexsignalconstellation-decodingofSTBC.

UNIT IV SPACE TIME TRELLIS CODES (STTC) 9

Space time coded systems, space time code word design criteria, design of space timeTrellis
Codes on slow fading channels, design of STTC on Fast Fading channels, performance analysis
in slow and fast fading channels, effect of imperfect channel estimation and Antenna correlation
on performance, comparison of STBC & STTC.

UNIT V LAYERED SPACE TIME CODES 9

LST transmitter – Horizontal and Vertical LST receiver – ML Rx, Zero forcing Rx; MMSE Rx,
SICRx, ZF V-blast Rx- MMSE V-blast Rx, Iterative Rx - capacity of MIMO – OFDM systems –
capacity of MIMO multi user systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have ability to
CO1: Analyze the capacity of MIMO channel
CO2: Analyze the performance of diversity combining techniques under fading
environment
CO3: Apply STBC in MIMO systems.
CO4: Apply STTC in MIMO systems
CO5: Analyze the use of layered space time codes for MIMO system.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. MohinderJankiraman,"Space Time Codes and MIMO Systems",Artech
House, Boston",[Link] [Link],2004.
2. Arogyaswami Paulraj Rohit Nabar,Dhananjay Gore,"Introduction of
Space Time Wireless Communication Systems",Cambridge University
Press,2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless
216
 Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
2. SergioVerdu" MultiUser Detection",CambridgeUniversityPress,1998.
3. AndreViterbi,"Principles of Spread SpectrumTechniques",
AddisonWesley1995.
4. VolkerKuhn,"Wireless communication over MIMO channels",John
Wiley and Sons Ltd.,2006.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1
Average 3 2.4 1 1 1

EC23C17 INTRODUCTION TO NANO ELECTRONICS L T P C

217
 3 0 0 3

UNIT I BASICS OF NANO ELECTRONICS 9

Scaling to nano-Light as a wave and particle- Electrons as waves and particles- origin of
quantum mechanics-General postulates of quantum mechanics-Spin and angular momentum-
Wave packets and uncertainty.

UNIT II ELECTRON CONFINEMENT IN LOW 9

DIMENSIONAL STRUCTURES
Statistics of the electrons in solids and nanostructures, Density of states in nanostrutures, Time
independent Schrodinger wave equation- Electron confinement-Quantum dots, electron
confinement Quantum wires, electron confinement Quantum wells.

UNIT III COULOMB BLOCKADE AND SINGLE ELECTRON 9

TRANSISTOR
Coulomb blockade-Coulomb blockade in Nano capacitors - Coulomb blockade in tunnel
junctions- Single electron transistors, Semiconductor nanowire SETs, Molecular SETs and
molecular electronics.

UNIT IV NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 9

Field-effect transistors, Quantum Cellular automata, Tunneling effect- Tunneling element -
Tunneling diode-Resonant Tunneling Devices- Light emitting diodes and lasers.

UNIT V SPIN BASED DEVICES 9

Ferro magnetic devices , Giant magnetoresistance devices ,Magnetic tunnel junction devices,
Spin transfer torque devices.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will have
CO1: Ability to familiarise the fundamental underpinnings of nano electronics.
CO2: Ability to analyse the electron properties of traditional low dimensional structures
CO3: Ability to comprehend the mechanism behind single electronic transistors.
CO4: Ability to analyse the key performance of nano electronic devices.
CO5: Ability to explore the basics of spin based devices.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Pearson education, 2009.
2. V. Mitin, V. Kochelap, and M. Stroscio, Introduction to Nanoelectronics:
Science, Nanotechnology, Engineering, and Applications, Cambridge University
Press, 2008

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jan Dienstuhl, Karl Goser, and Peter Glösekötter, “Nanoelectronics and
Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices”, Springer-
Verlag, 2004. (Unit II, IV & V)
2. Mircea Dragoman, Daniela Dragoman, Nanoelectronics: Principles and
Devices, Artech House, 2009.
3. Robert Puers, Livio Baldi, Marcel Van de Voorde, Sebastiaan E. van Nooten,
Nanoelectronics: Materials, Devices, Applications, Wiley, 2017.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:
218
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 1 1
CO5 3 1 1
Average 3 2 2 1 1

219
 EMERGING TECHNOLOGY COURSES

EC23E01 PRINCIPLES OF DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9

Elements of digital image processing systems, Image sensing and Acquisition, - Elements of
visual perception, brightness, contrast, hue, saturation, mach band effect, Color image
fundamentals - RGB, HSI models, Image sampling, Quantization, dither, Two-dimensional
mathematical preliminaries, 2D transforms - DFT, DCT, KLT, SVD

UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9

Point processing, Histograms, Histogram equalization and specification techniques, Noise

distributions, Spatial averaging, Directional Smoothing, Median, Geometric mean, Harmonic
mean, Contraharmonic mean filters, Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement.

UNIT III IMAGE RESTORATION 9

Image Restoration - degradation model, Unconstrained and Constrained restoration, Inverse

filtering, Wiener filtering, Geometric transformations-spatial transformations.

UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATIONAND MORPHOLOGY 9

Edge detection, Canny edge detection, Harris corner detection, Edge linking via Hough
transform, Thresholding - Region based segmentation– Region growing – Region splitting and
Merging, Contour based methods, Morphological Operations – Dilation, Erosion, Opening ,
Closing- Segmentation by morphological watersheds

UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION 9

Need for data compression, Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Shift codes, Arithmetic coding,
Vector Quantization, LZW compression, Transform coding, JPEG standard, MPEG
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to analyze the sampling and quantization effects in images and apply
appropriate transforms for image processing applications

CO2: Ability to utilize appropriate preprocessing techniques for manipulation of images

220
 CO3: Ability to apply restoration techniques to recover degraded images

CO4: Ability to employ image processing algorithms for extraction of region of interest

CO5: Ability to utilize and develop image compression techniques

TEXT BOOKS:
1.
Rafael [Link], Richard [Link]," Digital Image Processing"‘,Pearson,
Education,Inc.,4th Edition,2018.

2. Anil [Link],"Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing"‘,Pearson Education, Inc.,

2002.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Kenneth [Link]," Digital Image Processing", Pearson,2006.

2. Rafael [Link], Richard [Link], Steven Eddins,"Digita lImage Processing

using MATLAB",Pearson Education,Inc.,2004.

3. D,[Link] and [Link],"Multidimensional Digital Signal

Processing",Prentice Hall Professional Technical Reference,1990.

4. [Link],"Digital Image Processing",JohnWiley,NewYork,2002.

5. MilanSonkaetaI,"Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision",Brookes

/Cole,Vikas Publishing House,2nd Edition,1999.

6. [Link],"Handbook of image and Video Processing ", Elsevier Academic

press,2005.

7. [Link],"Digital Image Processing" Oxford University press, Edition 2011.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1
Average 3 2.4 1 1 1 1

221
EC23E02 5 G WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS OVERVIEW 9

Evolution from 1G to 5G, Analog voice systems in 1G, digital radio systems in 2G, voice and
messaging services, TDMA based GSM, CDMA, 2.5G (GPRS), 2.75G (EDGE); IMT2000, 3G
UMTS, W-CDMA, HSPA, HSPA+, 3G services and data rates, IMT Advanced, 4G, LTE, VoLTE,
OFDM, MIMO, LTE Advanced Pro (3GPP Release 13+), IMT2020, enhancements in
comparison to IMT Advanced.

UNIT II 5G COMMUNICATION 9
5G potential and applications, Usage scenarios, enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), ultra
reliable low latency communications (URLLC), massive machine type communications
(MMTC), D2D communications, V2X communications, Spectrum for 5G Dynamic, spectrum
access/sharing, millimeter Wave communication, carrier aggregation, small cells, dual
connectivity.

UNIT III MULTI-CARRIER WAVEFORMS AND MULTIPLE 9

ACCESS SCHEMES
Potential Candidate waveforms OF 5G- Principles, Transceiver block diagram, Frame structure,
Resource structure and mapping - Filter-bank based multi-carrier (FBMC), Universal filtered
multi carrier (UFMC), Generalized frequency division multicarrier (GFDM), MIMO-GFDM;
Principle, Transceiver model and types of NOMA - Power Domain NOMA, Sparse Code NOMA,
Power Domain Sparse Code NOMA and Cooperative NOMA

UNIT IV 5G NETWORK PROTOCOLS 9

New Radio (NR), Standalone and non-standalone mode, massive MIMO, beam formation, PHY
API Specification, flexible frame structure, Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP),
centralized RAN, open RAN, multi-access edge computing (MEC); Introduction to software
defined networking (SDN), network function virtualization (NFV), network slicing; restful API for
service-based interface, private networks.

UNIT V CURRENT STATE AND CHALLENGES AHEAD 9

5G penetration in developed countries; deployment challenges in low-middle income countries,

stronger backhaul requirements, dynamic spectrum access and usage of unlicensed spectrum,
contrasting radio resource requirements, large cell usage, LMLC, possible solutions for
connectivity in rural areas (BharatNet, TVWS, Long-range WiFi, FSO); non-terrestrial fronthaul
/ backhaul solutions: LEOs, HAP/UAV.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate understanding of the evolution of mobile communication
standards developed over the years
CO2: Demonstrate understanding of the potential of 5G Wireless Communication
and the enabling technologies

222
 CO3: Perform computations and solve problems on different multi-carrier options
and multiple access techniques.
CO4: Assess and evaluate how software defined network functions helps in
scalability and ease of operations.
CO5: Evaluate the use of advanced techniques in cellular communications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Evolution of air interface towards 5G, Suvra Shekhar Das and Ramjee Prasad,
2018
2. Afif Osseiran, Jose. F. Monserrat and Patrick Marsch,"5G Mobile
and Wireless CommunicationsTechnology",Cambridge
UniversityPress, 2016.
3. Xiang,W;Zheng,K;Shen,X.S;"5G MobileCommunications”,Springer,2016

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mobile Communications by Jochen Schiller Pub: Financial Times / Imprint of
Pearson
2. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications: Analog and Digital Systems by William
Lee, Pub: McGraw Hill Education
3. Mobile Communications Design Fundamentals by William Lee, Pub: Wiley
India Pvt. Ltd.
4. Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice by Theodore S. Rappaport,
Pub: Pearson

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 1 1
Average 2.6 2.2 1.8 1 1

223
 EC23E03 SPINTRONICS AND QUANTUM COMPUTING LTPC

3003

UNIT I LAWS OF SPINTRONICS AND SPIN ORBIT 9

The Early History of Spin, Quantum Mechanics of Spin, Spin – Orbit interaction, Spin – Orbit
interaction of Solids.

UNIT II SPIN ELECTRON TRANSPORT 9

Basic Electron Transport, Basic Electron Transport in thin film, Conduction in Discontinuous film,
Magneto-resistance, Spin-Dependent Scattering, Giant Magneto Resistance, Spin Dependent
Tunneling, Tunnel Magneto-resistance, MTJ, STT, SOT.

UNIT III SPIN TRANSISTOR 9

Silicon based spin electron device, Spin field effect transistor Spin injection, spin diffusion, Spin LED:
Fundamental and Application, Spin photo electronics Devices

UNIT IV ELECTRON SPINS IN QUANTUM DOTS AS 9

QUBITS

Conventional Vs Quantum Computing - Quantum Communication - Requirements for Quantum

Computing - Coupled Quantum Dots as Quantum Gates - Single-Spin Rotations - Read-Out of a
Single Spin – Electron Spin in Quantum Dots.

UNIT V QUANTUM COMPUTING WITH SPINS 9

The quantum inverter - NAND without energy dissipation - Universal reversible gate: Toffoli-Fredkin
gate, A-matrix – Quantum gates and circuits, Superposition states – Quantum parallelism - Universal
quantum gates – Quantum Algorithms and Circuits, Quantum Fourier transform.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course students will be able to

CO1: Ability to learn the laws of spintronics and spin orbit.

CO2: Ability to obtain spin based transport and its characteristics.

CO3: Identify the types of spintronics based devices.

CO4: Design quantum gates using qubits.

CO5: Apply the quantum principles to quantum universal gates.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bandyopadhyay S, Cahay M. Introduction to spintronics. CRC press; 2015.

224
 2. Awschalom DD, Loss D, Samarth N, editors. Semiconductor spintronics and quantum
computation. Springer Science & Business Media; 2013.
3. Hedin ER, Joe YS, editors. Spintronics in nanoscale devices. CRC Press; 2013 Aug 20.
4. D. J. Sellmyer, R. Skomski. Advanced Magnetic Nanostructures. SpringerPublishers, 2005.

REFERENCES

1. S. Maekawa. Concepts in Spin Electronics. Oxford University Press; 2006.

2. D.D. Awschalom, R.A. Buhrman, J.M. Daughton, S.V. Molnar, and M.L. Roukes, Spin
Electronics, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2004.
3. Y.B. Xu and [Link]. Spin Materials and Technology. Taylor & Francis, 2006.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CO1 3 3 2 1 2 1 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 2 1 1

CO3 3 3 2 1 2 1 1

CO4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1

CO5 3 3 2 1 2 1 1

Averag 3 3 2 1 2 1 1
e

225
EC23E04 CLOCK AND POWER MANAGEMENT CIRCUITS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I REFERENCE CIRCUITS 9

Performance Metrics, Current Mirrors, Self Biased Current Reference, startup circuits, VBE
based Current Reference, VT Based Current Reference, Band Gap Reference, Supply
Independent Biasing, Temperature Independent Biasing, PTAT and CTAT Current Generation,
Constant Gm Biasing

UNIT II LOW DROP OUT REGULATORS 9

Performance Metrics, Shunt regulator, Error amplifier, AC Design, Stability, Internal and External
Compensation,PSRR–Internal and External compensation circuits,NMOS vs. PMOS regulators.

UNIT III DC-DC CONVERTERS 9

Switching DC-DC converters, CCM and DCM modes of operation, design flow and specifications,
building blocks, components loss, small signal model of DC-DC converters, loop gain analysis,
frequency compensation of uncompensated DC-DC converters.

UNIT IV FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS 9

Integer-N Phase Lock Loop(PLL), Fractional-N Phase Lock Loop, Delay-Lock Loop (DLL),
multiplying- DLL, Injection-locked PLLs and Sub-sampled PLLs.

UNIT V CLOCK AND DATA RECOVERY CIRCUITS 9

Channel characteristics-intersymbol interference, eye diagrams, Linear equalization at the

transmitter and receiver; CDR Architectures,TransImpedance Amplifiers, Linear Half Rate CDR
Circuits,Wide capture Range CDR Circuits.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Design reference circuits for a given specification.

CO2: Design LDO and analyze its stability aspects.

CO3: Analyze DC-DC converters performance.

CO4: DesignFrequencysynthesizersmeetingagivenspecification.

CO5: Design clock generation circuits in the context of high speed I/Os, High speed
Broad Band Communication circuits and Data Conversion Circuits.

TEXT BOOKS:

226
1. Gabriel. [Link]-Mora,"Voltage references from diode to precision higher order band gap
circuits”,John wiley& Sons,Inc2002.

2. Gabriel. [Link]-Mora,“Analog IC Design With Low-Drop out Regulators”, McGraw-Hill

Professional Pub,2nd Edition,2014

3. [Link], “Phase Lock Techniques”John wiley &Sons,Inc2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. [Link], “Phase-Locked Loops:Design,Simulation,and Applications",McGrawHill, 2003.

2. Williams and Taylor,"Electronic Filter Design Handbook", McGraw-Hill,3rdEdition,1995

3. Deliyannis,Sun and Fidler,"Continuous-Time Active Filter Design",CRC Press1998

4. Behzad Razavi,“Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”,TataMc Graw Hill,2001.

5. Courses:ee5325_2017_2: start [Integrated Circuits and Systems group, IIT Madras]

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 2
Average 3 2.8 2.6 2.6 2 1 1 2

227
EC23E05 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND LTPC
COMPATIBILITY IN ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
3 003

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9

Classification of electromagnetic interference sources - Natural sources - Man-made sources

- Surveys of the electromagnetic environment.

UNIT II COUPLING MECHANISMS 9

Propagation and Cross talk – Basic Principles – Representation of EM Coupling from External
Fields – Determination of EM field generated by Transmission Lines – Electromagnetic
Coupling between Systems – Penetration and Coupling – Propagation and Cross Talk

UNIT III INTERFERENCE CONTROL TECHNIQUES 9

Shielding Theory – Shielding Effectiveness - Equipment screening - Cable screening -

grounding - Power-line filters - Isolation - Balancing - Signal-line filters - Nonlinear protective
devices

UNIT IV EMC STANDARDS, MEASUREMENTS AND 9

TESTING

Need for standards - The international framework - FCC – Military Standard MIL-STD-461D-
EMC measurement techniques – Measurement tools – Test environments – Transient EMI
test wave simulators

UNIT V EMC IN WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES AND 9

ELECTRIC VEHICLES

Efficient use of the frequency spectrum – EMC, Interoperability, and Coexistence –

Transmission of high frequency signals over telephone and power networks - EMC Problems
of Electric Vehicles - EMC Problems of Wireless Charging System, EMC Problems of Battery
Management System, Vehicle EMC Requirements.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Students will be able to:

CO1: Understand the various parameters in electromagnetic interference and compatibility

CO2: Summarize electromagnetic field coupling mechanisms

CO3: Analyze various interference control techniques

CO4: Appreciate the need for various standards and measurement procedures

228
CO5: Understand the impact of EMI on wireless technologies and Electric vehicles

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Christos Christopoulos, Principles and Techniques of Electromagnetic Compatibility,

CRC Press, Third Edition, 2023.
2. Li Zhai, Electromagnetic Compatibility of Electric Vehicle, 1st Edition, Springer 2021.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 1 3 3 3 1 1
CO4 3 1 1 1
CO5 3 1 2 1 1 1 1
Average 3 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 1

229
EC23E06 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I NUMBER THEORETIC AND ALGEBRAIC ALGORITHMS 9

Introduction to Network Security-Cryptography Attacks, Services and Mechanisms-Mathematics

of Cryptography: Modular Arithmetic, Modular Inverse: Extended Euclidean Algorithm, GF(2n )
fields: Polynomials- Classical Ciphers: Substitution, Transposition cipher - Steganography
UNIT II SYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS 9

Block ciphers: Overview of DES ,AES: Encryption and Decryption for AES, Key Expansion
Algorithm for AES –Modes of Block Ciphers-Stream Cipher:RC4, Application Example: WLAN
Security
UNIT III ASYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS 9

Primes, Primality testing, Factorization-Chinese Remainder Theorem-Quadratic Congruences-

Exponentiation and Logarithm- -RSA-Rabin – ElGammal
UNIT IV AUTHENTICATION AND KEY MANAGEMENT 9

Message integrity – Message authentication – SHA-512 – WHIRL POOL-Digital signature

Standard :DSA- Entity authentication– password – challenge response – Biometrics – Kerberos.
Key Management: Symmetric Key Management - Public Key Distribution-Diffie Hellman
technique
UNIT V NETWORK SECURITY PROTOCOLS 9

E-mail Security: PGP , S/MIME – Web Security: SSL and TLS - SET Protocol – Network layer
Security:IPsec - Internet Key Exchange – ISAKMP, Application Examples.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to apply and analyze modular arithmetic and various Classical Ciphers

CO2: Ability to develop and analyze symmetric key cryptosystems

CO3: Ability to develop and analyze Asymmetric key cryptosystems

CO4: Ability to develop and analyze authentication Schemes and key management
techniques.

CO5: Ability to apply and analyze different Network Security Protocol

230
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Behrouz [Link], Debdeep Mukhopadhyay, “Cryptography & Network

Security”, Tata McGraw hill, 2018.

2. William Stallings “Cryptography & Network Security: Principles & Practices”,

Eighth Edition, Pearson Education Limited,2022.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Douglas [Link] “Cryptography Theory and Practice”, CRC Press-Taylor and

Francis Group, 2018.

2. Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman, Mike Speciner “Network Security Private

Communication in a Public World”, Pearson India, 2016.

3. Eric Maiwald “Network Security A Beginner’s Guide”, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company limited, 2013

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 1 1 1 1
Average 3 2.4 1.5 1 1 1

231
EC23E07 IoT ENABLED SYSTEMS DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 9

Rise of the machines – Evolution of IoT – Web 3.0 view of IoT – Definition and characteristics
of IoT – IoT Enabling Technologies – IoT Architecture -– Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT – Functional
blocks of an IoT ecosystem – Sensors, Actuators, Smart Objects and Connecting Smart Objects
- IoT levels and deployment templates – A panaromic view of IoT applications

UNIT II MIDDLEWARE AND PROTOCOLS OF IOT 9

Middleware technologies for IoT system (IoT Ecosystem Overview – Horizontal Architecture
approach for IoT Systems – SOA based IoT Middleware) Middleware architecture of RFID,
WSN, SCADA, M2M –Interoperability challenges of IoT-Protocols for RFID, WSN, SCADA,
M2M- Zigbee, KNX, BACNet, MODBUS - Challenges Introduced by 5G in IoT
Middleware(Technological Requirements of 5G Systems - Perspectives and a Middleware
Approach Toward 5G (COMPaaS Middleware) – Resource management in IoT.

UNIT III COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING 9

IoT Access Technologies: Physical and MAC layers, topology and Security of IEEE 802.15.4,
802.15.4g, 802.15.4e, 1901.2a, 802.11ah and LoRaWAN – Network Layer: IP versions,
Constrained Nodes and Constrained Networks – Optimizing IP for IoT: From 6LoWPAN to 6Lo,
Routing over Low Power and Lossy Networks – Application Transport Methods: Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition –Application Layer Protocols: CoAP and MQTT- Data aggregation
& dissemination.

UNIT IV IOT IMPLEMENTATION TOOLS 9

Introduction to Python, Introduction to different IoT tools, Developing applications through IoT
tools, Developing sensor based application through embedded system platform, Implementing
IoT concepts with python, Implementation of IoT with Raspberry Pi.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Home automations - Smart cities – Environment – Energy – Retail – Logistics – Agriculture –

Industry - Health and life style – Case study
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Articulate the main concepts, key technologies, strength and limitations of IoT.
CO2: Identify the architecture, infrastructure models of IoT.
CO3: Analyze the networking and how the sensors are communicated in IoT.
CO4: Analyze and design different models for IoT implementation
CO5: Identify and design the new models for market strategic interaction.

232
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete Robert Barton, Jerome Henry, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of
Things”, Cisco Press, 2017.
2. Honbo Zhou, “Internet of Things in the cloud:A middleware perspective”, CRC press,
2012.
3. Vijay Madisetti and ArshdeepBahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach)”, VPT, 1st
Edition, 2014.
4. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , ―The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols, Wiley, 2012 .

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Pethuru Raj and Anupama C. Raman, "The Internet of Things: Enabling Technologies,
Platforms, and Use Cases", CRC Press.

2. Constandinos X. Mavromoustakis, George Mastorakis, Jordi MongayBatalla, “Internet of

Things (IoT) in 5G Mobile Technologies” Springer International Publishing Switzerland
2016.

3. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of

Things” Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2011.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO2 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO3 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO4 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3
Average 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3

233
EC23E08 INDUSTRIAL IOT AND INDUSTRY 4.0 (I) L T P C

2 0 2 3

UNIT I UNDERSTANDING IOT CONCEPT AND DEVELOPMENT PLATFORM (6)

IOT Definition, Importance of IoT, Applications of IOT, IoT architecture, Understanding - - working
of Sensors, Actuators, Sensor calibration, Study of Different sensors - Temperature sensor, Gas
sensor, Ultrasound sensor, LDR sensor, IR sensor and their characteristics, Introduction to Arduino-
- Installation, Programming.

Programming different Sensors for IoT application using Arduino (10)

• Write a program in Arduino for Temperature sensor to detect heat or fire.
• Write a program in Arduino for detecting LPG gas leak
• Write a program in Arduino for Ultrasound sensor for range detection
• Write a program in Arduino for LDR sensor, IR sensor

UNIT II ANALYZING & DECODING OF COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL USED IN IOT

DEVELOPMENT PLATFORM (6)

UART Communication Protocol, I2C Protocol device interfacing and decoding of signal, SPI
Protocol device interfacing and decoding of signal, WIFI and Router interfacing, Ethernet
Configuration, Bluetooth study and analysis of data flow, Zigbee Interfacing and study of signal
flow, WLAN analysis of 802.11a/b/g/j/p, 802.11n, 802.11ac Signals

.
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO RASPBERRY PI AND ITS INTERFACING CONCEPT (6)

IoT Physical Devices and Endpoints- Introduction to Raspberry Pi- Installation, Interfaces (serial,
SPI, I2C), Programming – Python program with Raspberry PI with focus on interfacing external
gadgets, controlling output, reading input from pins. Controlling Hardware- Connecting LED,
Buzzer, Switching High Power devices with transistors, Controlling AC Power devices with Relays,
Controlling servo motor, speed control of DC Motor, unipolar and bipolar Stepper motors; Sensors-
Light sensor, temperature sensor with thermistor, voltage sensor, ADC and DAC, Temperature and
Humidity Sensor DHT11, Motion Detection Sensors, Wireless Bluetooth Sensors, Level Sensors,
USB Sensors, Embedded Sensors, Distance Measurement with ultrasound sensor.

Programming different Sensors for IoT application using Raspberry Pi (10 )

• Write a program using Temperature sensor for detecting heat / fire using
Raspberry Pi
• Write a program to control the speed of DC Motor using Raspberry Pi.
• Write a program using Bluetooth module to control LED using Raspberry Pi.
• Write a program for Ultrasound sensor for range detection using Raspberry Pi.
• Write a program to detect motion using Raspberry Pi.

UNIT IV CLOUD SERVICES USED IN IOT DEVELOPMENT PLATFORM (6)

234
Configuration of the cloud platform, Sending data from the IOT nodes to the gateways using
different communication options; Transferring data from gateway to the cloud; Exploring the web
services like mail, Messaging (SMS) and Twitter etc.; Tracking of cloud data as per the requirement;
Google Cloud service architect; AWS clod Services architect; Microsoft Azure cloud services
Architect; OPEN source Cloud Services; Initial State IoT Dashboard & Cloud Services.
Programs on IoT application using Cloud services (10)
• Write a program to control LEDs using Alexa Echo Dot.
• Write a program to control Buzzer using Alexa Echo Dot.
• Write a program to control DC motor using Google Assistance.
• Write a program to control Stepper motor using Google Assistance

UNIT V CHALLENGES IN IOT SYSTEM DESIGN – HARDWARE & SOFTWARE (6)

Antenna design and placement, Chip-package system development, Power electronics,

electromagnetic interference/compatibility (EMI/EMC), Electronics reliability; Battery simulation.

THEORY : 30 PERIODS

PRACTICAL: 30 PERIODS
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Understand the building blocks of IoT technology and explore the vast spectrum of
IoTapplications using Arduino.
CO2: Comprehend the importance of communication protocols in IoT domain.

CO3: Use processors and peripherals to design and build, IoT hardware

CO4: Connect numerous IOT applications with cloud services

CO5: Understand the challenges in IoT system design.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. “Internet of Things - A Hands-on Approach”, Arshdeep

Bahga and Vijay Madisetti,Universities Press, 2015, ISBN:
9788173719547

2. “Getting Started with Raspberry Pi”, Matt Richardson & Shawn

Wallace, O'Reilly (SPD),2014, ISBN: 9789350239759.

Arduino Book for Beginners Paperback – 1 July 2021 by Mike

3.
Cheich

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raspberry Pi Cookbook, “Software and Hardware Problems and Solutions”, Simon

235
 Monk,O'Reilly (SPD), 2016, ISBN 7989352133895

2. N. Ida, “Sensors, Actuators and Their Interfaces”, SciTech Publishers, 2014.

3. Peter Waher, “Learning Internet of Things”, Packt Publishing, 2015 3. Editors

Ovidiu Vermesan

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
Average 3 2.25 2.4 2.2 2 2.2 1 1 1 1.8

VERTICAL – MINOR DEGREE

ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS

EC23C26 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES 9

Review of Properties of Semiconductor Materials - Theory of PN Junction Diode V-I

Characteristics and its Temperature dependence - Break down mechanisms - Applications:
Rectifiers - Clipper – Clamper, Zener diode- V-I Characteristics - Break down mechanisms -
Tunnel Diode, Application: Voltage regulator and Varactor Diode Characteristics.

236
UNIT II BJT,FET AND CMOS 9

BJT: Transistor types - transistor action - current components - transistor as a switch and
amplifier Field effect transistor :JFET and its characteristics - JFET parameters and
configurations - MOSFET – types - VI-characteristics - principle of operation. CMOS:
Introduction to NMOS and PMOS transistors and their characteristics.

UNIT III DC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 9

Basic Components of Electric Circuits, Charge, current, Voltage and Power, Voltage and Current
Sources, Ohms Law, Kirchoff‘s Current Law, Kirchoff‘s voltage law, Resistors in Series and
Parallel, voltage and current division, Nodal analysis, Mesh analysis.

UNIT IV NETWORK THEOREM AND SINUSOIDAL STEADY STATE 9

ANALYSIS

Superposition theorem, Thevenin and Norton theorems-equivalent circuits, Maximum Power

Transfer theorem, Delta-Wye Conversion-Sinusoidal Stead State analysis: Characteristics of
Sinusoids, Complex Forcing Function, Phasor, Phasor relationship for R, L, and C, impedance
and Admittance.

UNIT V TRANSIENTS AND RESONANCE IN RLC CIRCUITS 9

The Source- Free RL and RC Circuit, Transient Response of RL, RC, RLC circuits for DC and
Sinusoidal Excitation using Laplace transform, Parallel Resonance, Series Resonance, Quality
Factor.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to understand the working of a diode and its applications

CO2: Ability to understand the functioning of various types of transistor

CO3: Ability to apply the basic laws for DC circuits Analysis

CO4: Ability to apply Network Theorems in DC and analyze AC circuits for phase
relationship

CO5: Ability to analyse RLC circuits

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Millman J, Halkias C. C. "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th ed,
New Delhi, 2015.
2. Hayt Jack Kemmerly, Steven Durbin, "Engineering Circuit Analysis", Mc Graw Hill
education, 9th Edition, 2018.

237
 3. Robert.L. Boylestead, "Introductory Circuit Analysis", Pearson Education India, 12th
Edition, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Boylestad, R. L. and Nashelsky, L. "Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory ",

Pearson Education, New Delhi, 11th ed, 2013.
2. Charles K. Alexander & Mathew [Link], "Fundamentals of Electric Circuits",
Mc Graw- Hill, 2nd Edition, 2003.
3. [Link], J.A. Stuller, "Basic Circuit Analysis", Jaico Publishing House,
2005.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1
Average 3 2 1.2 1 1

EC23C27 INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL ELECTRONICS L T P C

2 0 2 3

UNIT I NUMBER SYSTEMS 6L

Number Systems – Decimal, Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal, 1‘s and 2‘s complements, Codes – Binary,
BCD, 84-2-1, 2421, Excess 3, Biquinary, Gray, Alphanumeric codes.

UNIT II BOOLEAN ALGEBRA 6L,6P

238
Boolean theorems, Logic gates, Universal gates, Sum of products and product of sums, Minterms and
Maxterms, Karnaugh map and Tabulation methods, Realization of Boolean expression using logic
gates.
• Realization of Boolean Expressions using Logic gates
UNIT III COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN 6L,12P

Problem formulation and design of combinational circuits - Code-Converters, Half and Full Adders,
Binary Parallel Adder Magnitude Comparator, Decoder, Encoder, Mux/Demux
• Realization of code convertors
• Realization of Adders

UNIT IV SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 6L,12P

Flip-flops- latches - Synchronous sequential circuits–Design of synchronous and asynchronous

counters- Shift registers techniques-sequence detector,applications.
• Verification of truth table for D , JK Flip flops
• Realization of synchronous counters using Flip flops
• Realization of sequence detector

UNIT V PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES 6L

Classification of memories, Read/write operations- Memory decoding and expansion, Static and
Dynamic RAM- PLDs- Architecture, Introduction to FPGA.

THEORY : 30 PERIODS

PRACTICAL: 30 PERIODS

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to Understand different number systems

CO2: Ability to apply Boolean algebra and simplification procedure to digital logic

CO3: Ability to design combinational digital circuits using logic gates

CO4: Ability to understand the design of sequential circuits

CO5: Ability to understand the memory devices and programmable logic devices.

239
TEXT BOOKS:

1. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, ‘Digital Design’, Pearson, 5th Edition, 2013.

2. Charles H. Roth, Jr, ‘Fundamentals of Logic Design’, Jaico Books, 4th Edition, 2002.

3. Michael D. Ciletti , "Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL", 2nd Edition, Pearson,
2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. William I. Fletcher, "An Engineering Approach to Digital Design", Prentice- Hall of India, 1980.

2. Floyd T.L., "Digital Fundamentals", Charles E. Merril publishing company,1982.

3. John. F. Wakerly, "Digital Design Principles and Practices", Pearson Education, 4th
Edition,2007.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1
Average 3 2 1.8 1 1

EC23C28 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTROMAGNETICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I STATIC ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 9

Vectors and co-ordinate systems: Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical co-ordinate systems- scalar
and vector fields.
Conductors in static electric field- Dielectrics in static electric field- Electric flux density and dielectric
constant- Boundary conditions, Static Magnetic Field-Lorentz force equation, Ampere's law, Biot-
Savart law, Magnetic flux density, Magnetic Energy.

UNIT II TIME VARYING FIELDS

9

Faraday's law, Displacement current and Maxwell-Ampere law, Maxwell's equations, Potential
functions, Electromagnetic boundary conditions, Wave equations and solutions, Time-harmonic
fields.

240
UNIT III PLANE WAVE PROPAGATION 9

Uniform plane waves and sinusoidally varying waves in time domain and in free space –
polarization – power flow and Poynting vector – wave parameters – plane waves in material
media – skin effect – reflection and transmission of uniform plane waves – normal and oblique
incidence in conductor and dielectric interfaces.

UNIT IV TRANSMISSION LINE BASICS 9

Transmission line – general solution, Transmission line equivalent circuit, open and short
circuited lines - Input impedance, SWR and Power, Characteristic impedance, Impedance
matching, Microstrip transmission lines.

UNIT V ANTENNA BASICS 9

Scalar and vector potentials, Radiation from a current filament, Overview of half wave dipole,
Antenna characteristics, radiation pattern, radiation intensity, directivity and power gain,
Overview of Yagi-Uda array, Reflector antennas, Microstrip patch antenna, Introduction to
modern antennas.

TOTAL : PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1:Understand static EM field concepts

CO2:Understand time varying EM fields and solve engineering problems using Maxwell’s law.

CO3:Understand and analyze plane wave propagation.

CO4:Understand the basics of transmission lines.

CO5:Understand the basics of antenna theory.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. [Link] and [Link], Principles of electromagnetics, 6th ed.,Oxford

(AsianEdition),2015

2. John D Ryder, “Networks lines and fields”, 2nd ed, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi,2005

3. A. C. Balanis, “Antenna theory: Analysis and design”, 3rd edJohn Willey and Son's
Inc., New York, 2012.
4. John Kraus, “Electromagnetics”, McGraw Hill, 2nd ed, 2017.

241
 5. John D Kraus,“Antennas for all Applications”, 5th ed, McGrawHill, 2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. E. C. Jordan and K. G. Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”

2nd ed, Prentice Hall, 2015.

2. Fawwaz Ulaby, “Fundamentals of Applied Electromagnetics”, Prentice Hall, 2007.

3. D.K. Cheng, “Field and Eave Electromagnetics, 2nd ed, Pearson(India), 2002.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 1
Average 3 1.6 1 1 1 1

242
EC23C29 INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I ANALOG MODULATION SYSTEMS 9

Communication system model – Amplitude Modulation – DSBFC, DSBSC, SSB,VSB -

Comparison of AM systems - FDM -FM and PM - Narrow band FM and Wideband FM -
Bandwidth requirements- Carson‘s Rule.

UNIT II NOISE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9

Types of Noise – Noise Calculations-Transmitter characteristics & Classification - AM

broadcasting transmitters - Pilot carrier technique- FM transmitters. Receiver -characteristics
and Classification, Superheterodyne receivers.

UNIT III PULSE MODULATION SCHEMES 9

Sampling -Pulse Amplitude Modulation – TDM - Pulse Width Modulation – Pulse Position
Modulation–Quantization - PCM -DPCM– Delta Modulation – Adaptive Delta Modulation

UNIT IV INFORMATION THEORY AND BASEBAND SIGNALLING 9

Review of Probability theory and random process - Self information measure - Entropy function
-Conditional Entropies - Mutual information - Redundancy - Efficiency and channel capacity-
Shannon‘s Hartley Law - Concept of base band signaling - Signaling formats - Line coding – ISI.

UNIT V PASSBAND SIGNALLING AND ERROR CONTROL CODING 9

Introduction to ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK - M-ary signaling -Parity check codes - Linear block codes
- convolution codes -Viterbi Decoding

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to understand the basics of amplitude and frequency modulation
Techniques.

CO2: Ability to classify the noise types and understand the functioning of transmitters
and receivers

CO3: Ability to differentiate the various pulse modulation schemes

CO4: Ability to encode and decode source symbols and determine the channel capacity
and also to analyze baseband signaling schemes

CO5: Ability to apply error control coding schemes and analyze its performance

243
TEXT BOOKS:

1. [Link], "Communication Systems ", John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2007.

2. S. Haykin, "Digital Communications", John Wiley, 2015.

3. [Link], "Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems", Oxford

University Press, 3rd Edition, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. [Link], [Link], "Fundamentals of Communication Systems", Pearson

Education 2006.
2. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series, "Analog and Digital Communications", TMH 2006

3. [Link], "Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications", Pearson

Education 2nd Edition, 2007.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1
Average 3 2 1 1 1

244
EC23C30 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9

Reflection, Diffraction and Scattering of EM waves-Large scale path loss - Free Space and Two-Ray
models– Small scale fading- Parameters of mobile multipath channels, classification of multipath fading
channels.
UNIT II CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATION 9

Introduction-Frequency Reuse-Channel Assignment Strategies-Hand off Strategies, Interference and

System Capacity-Capacity improvement techniques

UNIT III WIRELESS LAN 9

Introduction to wireless LANs - IEEE 802.11 WLANs - Physical Layer- MAC sublayer- MAC Management
Sublayer- Wireless ATM - HIPERLAN- HIPERLAN-2

UNIT IV WIRELESS INTERFACES – BLUETOOTH, ZIGBEE, LORA 9

Architecture and Applications - IEEE 802.15.4, Bluetooth, Zigbee, LORA, 6LOWPAN, Wi-Fi, WIMAX.

UNIT V 5G WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES 9

Evolution from 1G to 5G, 3G UMTS, W-CDMA, 3G services and data rates, IMT Advanced, 4G, LTE,
OFDM, MIMO, Introduction to 5G Technologies- IoT- Architecture, M2M, SCADA and RFID.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will have

CO1: Ability to understand the wireless channel characteristics and behavior.

CO2: Ability to understand the cellular communication techniques

CO3: Ability to understand the protocol architecture of WLAN

CO4: Ability to understand the architecture and application of different wireless interfaces used in
real time.

CO5: Ability to understand the current trends in wireless communication

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rappaport,T.S., “Wireless communications”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2010.

2. Clint Smith. P.E and Daniel Collins, “3G Wireless Networks”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2007.
3. Vijay. K. Garg, “Wireless Communication and Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,
[Link] 2007.
4. Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann,“6LoWPAN:The Wireless Embedded Internet”, John Wiley
Sons, 2009.
245
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Perry Lea, “IoT and Edge Computing for Architects: Implementing edge and IoT systems
from sensors to clouds with communication systems, analytics, and security”, 2nd Edition,
2020.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 1
Average 2 2 1 1 1 1

246
EC23C31 INTRODUCTION TO THE INTERNET OF THINGS AND L T P C
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 9

IoT Definition and Characteristics – Evolution of IoT- IoT Enabling Technologies and the
Complex Interdependence of Technologies, IoT Networking Components, Addressing
Strategies of IoT.

UNIT II SENSORS NETWORKS 9

Definition, Types of Sensors, Types of Actuators, Examples and Working, IoT Development
Boards: Arduino IDE and Board Types, RaspberriPi Development Kit, RFID Principles and
components, Wireless Sensor Networks: History and Context, node, Connecting nodes,
Networking Nodes, WSN and IoT.

UNIT III IOT APPLICATIONS 9

Home Automation, Smart Cities, Energy, Retail Management, Logistics, Agriculture, Health and
Lifestyle, Industrial IoT, Legal challenges, IoT design Ethics, IoT in Environmental Protection.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9

Embedded system processor, hardware unit, software embedded into a system, Example of an
embedded system, Embedded Design life cycle, Layers of Embedded Systems

UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN USING GENERAL PURPOSE PROCESSOR 9

Microcontroller architectures (RISC, CISC), Embedded Memory, Strategic selection of

processor and memory, Memory Devices and their Characteristics, Cache Memory and Various
mapping techniques, DMA.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Describe the evolution of IoT, IoT networking components, and addressing
strategies in IoT.
CO2: Understand the various concepts of sensors and actuators for design of
IoT.
CO3: Understand various applications of IoT.

CO4: Comprehend Embedded Processor and its software

CO5: Design an Embedded system using processors, memory I/O devices and
communication network within realistic constraints

247
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sudip Misra, Anandarup Mukherjee, Arijit Roy, “Introduction to IoT”, Cambridge

University Press 2021.

2. Hakima Chaouchi, “The Internet of Things Connecting Objects to the Web” ISBN :
978-1- 84821-140-7, Wiley Publications

3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, and Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things:
Key Applications and Protocols”, Wiley Publications

4. Wayne Wolf “Computers as components: Principles of Embedded Computing

System Design”, The Morgan Kaufmann Series in Computer Architecture

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Vijay Madisetti and Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on-

Approach)”,1st Edition, VPT, 2014.
2. Francis da Costa, “Rethinking the Internet of Things: A Scalable Approach to
Connecting Everything”, 1st Edition, Apress Publications, 2013.
3. Shibu K V," Introduction to Embedded Systems", McGraw Hill Education(India)
Private Limited, 2014.
4. Lyla B. Das," Embedded Systems an Integrated Approach", Pearson Education,
2013.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3
Average 3 2.33 2.8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.8

EC23C32 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT L T P C

248
 2 0 2 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN

6

History, basic physics of passive components, Evolution and Inventors of Electronic

Components, basics of digital electronics-logic gates, Digital system design: Digital to Analog
converters, Analog to Digital converters, Application- Alphanumeric display Classification,
Motion Sensors, Thermal Sensors and Image Sensors, PIR, IR and Water Level Sensors.

UNIT II FUNDAMENTALS OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 6

Fundamentals of Electronic Components, Overview of PCB's, Classes and types of PCB's,

Choosing of PCB Materials, TH Components, SMD Components and its form factors, Layout
planning, Placement rules, Routing techniques for PCB's, PCB Dimensions and Tolerances,
Copper Trace and Etching Tolerances, Standard Hole Dimensions, Solder mask Tolerance,
Thermal issues, PCB terminologies, Post processing of PCB design and Fabrication.

UNIT III PCB DESIGN FLOW USING EDA TOOL 6

Electronic Design Automation Tools (EDA), Schematic capture, Component Selection,

Annotation, Foot print assignment, Wiring, Design Rule Check, Netlist generation, Convert to
PCB, Component Placement, Manual Routing, Auto Routing, Gerber file generation.

UNIT IV COMPONENT ASSEMBLY ON PCB'S AND ITS SOLDERING 6

TECHNIQUES

Drilling Concepts, Component Placement and Orientation, TH Component Assembly, Hand

Soldering Techniques, SMD Component Assembly using PICK and PLACE machine, SMD
Component Soldering using Reflow oven machine, PCB inspection.

UNIT V PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 6

Study of Astable and Monostable Multivibrator using IC555 timer, Comparator using op-amp
IC741, LED Chases using Shift register, Controlling relay using op-amp, design a automatic light
control using op-amp IC741, design a water level controller using IC741.
THEORY : 30 PERIODS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Fabrication of PCB using traditional method.

2. Fabrication of PCB using LASER technology
3. Component Placement and its assembly Processes using TH components.
4. Component Placement and its assembly Processes using SMD components
5. Toggle a LED using IC555 Timer Astable and Monostable Multivibrator.
6. To design a counter using Shift Register.
PRACTICAL: 30 PERIODS

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

249
COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

CO1: Understand the basics of electronic system design related to the design and
fabrication of PCBs.

CO2: Lead new users of the software through a very simple PCB design.

CO3: Know and guide in designing plated through-holes, surface-mount lands, and
Layout footprints in general.

CO4: Construct capture parts using the Capture Library Manager and Part Editor.

CO5: Understand fabrication steps and fabricate PCBs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Grob. B and Schultz. M.E. ‘Basic Electronics’, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2003.

2. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Electronics Devices’, Pearson Education, 2002.

3. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Digital Fundamentals’, Pearson Education, 2003.

4. Kraig Mitzner,“Complete PCB Design Using OrCad Capture and

Layout”,Newness,1st Edition,2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Simon Monk, “Make Your Own PCBs with EAGLE: From Schematic Designs to
Finished Boards”, McGraw-Hill Education TAB; 2ndEdition, 2017.
2. Douglas Brooks, “Signal Integrity Issues and Printed Circuit Board Design”, Prentice
Hall, 2012.
3. Lee W. Ritchey , John Zasio, Kella J. Knack, “Right the First Time: a Practical
Handbook on High Speed PCB and System Design”,Speeding Edge,2003.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 1 3 3 1 1 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 3
Average 2.8 2.4 1.6 1.2 3 3 1 1 2.2 3

250
 OPEN ELECTIVES

EC23901 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES :

• To make the students to understand the concepts of electronics components, and the
design of various combinational circuits.
• To introduce the Microcomputer Instrumentation and Electronics engine controlability
• To introduce sensor based electronics applications.
• To introduce the motion control, Instrumentation and Telematics.
• To impart knowledge on future automotive systems.

UNIT I AUTOMOTIVE AND ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS 9

Introduction to Automobile Engineering, Automotive Engines and Control Systems, Electronic

Engine Management Systems. Introduction to Basic Electronics- Semiconductor Devices.
Diodes, Rectifiers, Transistors. Logic Gates, Combinational Circuits and Microprocessors.
UNIT II MICROCOMPUTER INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRONICS 9
ENGINE CONTROL

Microcomputer Fundamentals- Digital Vs Analog Computers, Microcomputers Vs Mainframe

Computers and basic computer programming. Instrumentation Examples of
Microcomputer. Electronic Engine Control Motivation. Engine Performance Terms, Electronic
Fuel Control systems, Catalytic Converters, Idle Speed Control, Electronic Ignition Systems
UNIT III SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9

Basic Measurement System, Sensory-Airflow Sensor, Pressure Sensor, Magnetic and hall
Effect Sensors, Optical Positioning Sensors. Exhaust and Knock Sensors. Automotive Engine
Control Actuators- Fuel Control Actuators, Exhaust Recirculation Actuators, Electrical Motors
–Brushless DC and Stepper Motors Ignition System
UNIT IV MOTION CONTROL, INSTRUMENTATION AND TELEMATICS 9

Digital Engine Control and Features, Control Modes- Fuel Control, Engine Start, Engine Crank
and Warm-Up, Speed Control Acceleration / Deceleration, EGR Control and Hybrid Electric
Vehicle Power train Control, Electronic Steering Control and Electronic Suspension Systems.
Advantages of Computer-Based Instrumentation, Digital Consoles – High-Speed Digital
Communications CAN, Display Devices LED, LCD, Flat Panel Display, Trip Information
Computer, Telematics, GPS Navigation and Structure.

UNIT V DIAGNOSIS AND FUTURE AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS 9

Electronic Control System Diagnostics, Service Bay Diagnostic Tool, Onboard Diagnostics,
Model-Based Sensor Failure Detection, Diagnostic Fault Codes, Onboard
251
Diagnosis(OBDII),Model-Based Misfire Detection System, Expert Systems in Automotive
Diagnosis, Occupant Protection Systems. Future Automotive Systems- Alternative Engine,
Advanced Travel and Safety Control-Collision Avoidance Radar Warning System. Low
Tire Pressure Warning System. Sensor Multiplexing and Automatic Driving Control.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1:Recognize electronics components required for automotive electronic based systems.

CO2:Understand microcomputer Instrumentation and Electronics Engine Control.
CO3:Gain knowledge to design sensor based electronic applications.
CO4:Comprehend vehicular communication and motor control concepts in automotive
engineering.
CO5:Have an exposure to future automotive systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. William B. Ribbens. “Understanding Automotive Electronics” –An Engineering

Perspective, 7thEdition, Butterworth. Heinemann Woburn,2017.

2. Tom Weather Jr and Cland C Hunter “Automotive Computers and Control System”
PrenticeHall Inc, New Jersey, July 2016.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

[Link] Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronic System”, Fourth edition,routledge,2017

[Link] William, “Understanding Automotive Electronics, Elsevier – Health Sciences

Division, 2020

3.V.A.W Hillier “Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics” Second Edition OUP Oxford

publisher, 1996.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1

252
EC23902 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

UNIT I ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 9

History, Evolution and Inventors of Electronic Components - Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors - Types,
Construction and Functions, Cables – Construction, Characteristics, Types- High Impedance, Low
Impedance, Ribbon, High Temperature, Flat Twin, RF, Telephone, Optical Fiber, Connectors, Switches,
Relays, Displays (construction an working) –LED, LCD, LASER, Application- Alphanumeric display.

UNIT II BASIC ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND ITS WORKING 9

History, Evolution and Inventors of Electronics Devices- PN Junction Diodes, Zener, Bipolar Junction
Transistors, Field Effect Transistors- JFET & MOSFET, Uni Junction Transistors, Silicon Controlled
Rectifier.

UNIT III DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 9

Boolean algebra, Logic Gates, Half and Full adders, Decoder, Encoder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Flip
flops- JK, RS, T, D- construction, Truth table, Characteristic equation, Digital to Analog converters,
Analog to Digital converters.

UNIT IV INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 9

Evolution and Inventors of Integrated Circuits – Structure, Scale/Level, Classification, Surface

Mount Devices and Surface Mount Technology, Printed Circuit Boards, Semiconductor
Manufacturing Case Study.

UNIT V ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS 9

Tsunami Warning System – Detection (Seismometer), Data processing and Management, Alert
Signal & Messaging, E Nose - Detection (Chemical Sensors), Data processing and Classification,
Agriculture Robots – Detection (Navigation, Soil and Crop Sensors), Processing, and Actuation.
Automotive electronics – Engine Control, Braking, Driver Assistance, Navigation, Safety and
Communication Systems- Video Illustrations.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Identify electronics components required for electronic based systems.

CO2: Comprehend basic electronic devices working.

CO3: Ability to design digital electronic systems.

CO4: Gain knowledge on design and fabrication of Integrated Circuits.

CO5: Analyze sensor based electronics applications.

253
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Malvino, ‘Electronic Principles’, McGraw Book Co., 1993.

2. Robert [Link], Louis Nashelsky, “ Electronic devices and circuit theory”, Pearson
education, Eleventh edition, 2015

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Grob. B and Schultz. M.E. ‘Basic Electronics’, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2003.

2. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Electronics Devices’, Pearson Education, 2002.

3. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Digital Fundamentals’, Pearson Education, 2003.

4. Millman, Halkias Jacob, Jit Christos and Satyabrata, ‘Electronic devices and Circuits’,
Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2015

5. V. R. Deo, Electronic Components and Applications, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd. 2012

6. [Link]/main/resources

7. www. [Link]/tag/5783/electronic-noses

8. [Link]

9. Make Electronics – Learning by Discovery by Charles Platt, 3rd edition,2021.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 2 3 2 1 1
CO3 1 3 2 2 1 1
CO4 1 3 1 2 1 1
CO5 1 2 3 2 1 1
AVG 1.4 2.2 2 1.2 1 1

254
EC23903 WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES :

• To provide basic understanding about wired and wireless communication.

• To have an exposure to Internet of Things and applications.
• To know the basic wireless network security.
• To get exposed to antenna systems.
• To understand various satellite communication.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 9

Basics of Communication, Spectrum - FCC, Transceiver design and its Components, Wired and wireless
communication. Modulation techniques, OSI Layers, TCP/IP Protocols 1G to 5G developments; 3G, 4G
and 5G cell architecture.

UNIT II INTERNET OF THINGS 9

Introduction, IoT- Architecture, IEEE 802.15.4, M2M and IoT Protocols, SCADA and RFID Protocols,
Architecture and Applications - Bluetooth, Zigbee, LORA, 6LOWPAN, Wi-Fi, WIMAX.

UNIT III WIRELESS NETWORK SECURITY 9

Cryptography, Integrity, Authentication and Key management, Wireless Threats – Hacking 802.11,
Eavesdropping, Jamming, Cyber-crimes and awareness – countermeasures, Wireless Security.

UNIT IV ANTENNA SYSTEMS 9

Introduction, Types of Antennas, Radiation Mechanisms and Measurements, Dipole, Monopole, Mobile
Phone Antenna, Smart Antennas, RFID antennas, Automotive Antenna, Reconfigurable Antennas, SAR
measurements.

UNIT V SATELLITE COMMUNICATION 9

Basic principles, Kepler’s law, Types of satellites – LEO, MEO and GEO. Launch Vehicles, Satellite
Subsystems and Satellite links, Applications – GPS, Mobile communication and TV broadcast,
Navigation systems, Modern Navigation systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Analyze the wired and wireless communication and networks. To be able to Internet
of Things for various applications.

CO2: Analyze the wired and wireless communication and networks. To be able to Internet
of Things for various applications.

CO3: Apply security protocols in Wireless Networks.

255
 CO4: Explore the antenna systems for Wireless Technologies.

CO5: Understand Satellite Communication technologies.

TEXT BOOKS:

[Link] G Proakis, Masoud Salehi, “Communication Systems Engineering” Prentice Hall,1994

[Link] Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things- Key applications and
Protocols”, Wiley 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

[Link] Roddy, “Satellite Communication”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009.

[Link] A. Forouan, “Data Communication and Networking” 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.

[Link] Madisetti and Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach)”, VPT, 1 stEdition,

2014.

[Link],Jose. [Link] and PatrickMarsch, “5G Mobile and Wireless

Communications Technology”, Cambridge University Press, 2016.

[Link] Maduranga Silva Thotahewa, Jean-Michel Redoute, Mehmet Rasit Yuce, “Ultra

Wideband Wireless Body Area Networks”, Springer, 2016.

[Link] Pratt and Charles [Link], “Satellite Communications”, John Wiley and Sons,2nd
Edition, 2012.

7.M. Richharia, "Satellite Systems for Personal Applications", John W iley, 2010

[Link]. A, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 3rd edition, John Wiley and sons, NewYork,
1982.

[Link] Stallings, “Cryptography & Network Security - Principles and Practices” Pearson
Education, 4th Edition, 2006.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 1

256
EC23904 MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES :

• To study different microcontroller internal architectures.

• To learn the assembly language and C programming - microcontrollers.
• To learn the interfacing concepts in microcontrollers.
• To design a microcontroller system with different basic hardware.
• To program the microcontroller for real time applications – case study.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO 8051 MICRO CONTROLLER 9

Overview of 8051 Micro Controller, Architecture, I/O ports and Memory Organization, Interrupts,
Timer/Counter and Serial Communication, Programming in Assembly language.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO PIC MICROCONTROLLER 9

PIC microcontroller Architecture - Memory - Parallel ports - Interrupts - Timers/Counters - UART- A/D
converter – PW, Programming in Assembly language.

UNIT III PROGRAMMING WITH C 9

Introduction to C - Microchip MPLAB IDE - CCS PCM C compiler - Proteus VSM - Microchip PICDEM
Mechatronics board, case study.

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF 8051 9

Human interface from switches to keypads - LED displays - LCD - interfacing to the physical world- simple
sensors: micro switch, Light-dependent resistors, Optical object sensing, opto-sensor applied as a shaft
encoder, Ultrasonic object sensor - Actuators: DC and stepper motors - Interfacing to actuators, case
study.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF PIC MICROCONTROLLERS 9

LED Chasing circuit - Four digit LED Display interface, Interrupt driven event counter with 4-digit LED
display - Simple Buzzer interface, Speaker interface - Electronic Siren - Interfacing Digital temperature
sensor - Analog temperature sensor IC with A/D converter, case study.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Know the internal architecture of the 8051 microcontrollers.

CO2: Know the internal architecture of the PIC microcontrollers.

CO3: Program in assembly and C with microcontrollers.

CO4: Understand the basic hardware interfacing with microcontroller system.

CO5: Find effective solutions to a wide range of real-world microcontroller applications.

257
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice GilliMazidi, The 8051 Micro Controller and Embedded
Systems‘, Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2007.

2. Martin [Link], Programming 8-bit PIC Microcontrollers in C with interactive hardware

simulation, Newnes Press, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Tim Wilmshurst, Designing Embedded Systems with PIC Microcontrollers Principles and
applications, Newnes, Elsevier, 2007.

2. Milan Verle, PIC Microcontrollers – Programming In C, Mikro Elektronika, 2009.

3. Lambert M. Surhone, Miriam T. Timpledon, Susan F. Marseken, Proteus (DesignSoftware),

VDM Publishing, 2010

4. Hubert Henry Ward, C Programming for the PIC Microcontroller: Demystify Coding with
Embedded Programming, Apress; 1st ed. Edition, December 2019.

5. Dogan Ibrahim, Microcontroller Projects in C for the 8051, Newnes, 2000.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 2 1 1
CO2 1 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 1 3 1 1
CO5 1 3 3 1 1 1

258
EC23905 CONSUMER ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES :

• To acquaint the students with the construction, theory and operation of the basic electronic
devices such as PN junction diode, Bipolar and Field Effect Transistors, Power control devices
etc.,
• To know about the working principle of LED, LCD and other Opto-electronic devices.
• To introduce the concept of Sensors and voice controls.
• To provide the knowledge on Smart home devices.
• To gain knowledge on current communication technology.

UNIT I CONSUMER ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS 9

History of Electronic Devices- Vacuum Tubes, Transistors, Integrated Circuits- Moorse Law,
Semiconductor Devices, Diodes, Rectifiers, Transistors, Logic Gates, Combinational Circuits, ADC, DAC
and Microprocessors, Microprocessor Vs Microcontrollers, Microcontrollers in consumer electronics,
Energy management, Intelligent Building Perspective.

UNIT II ENTERTAINMENT ELECTRONICS 9

Audio systems: Construction and working principle of: Microphone, Loud speaker, AM and FM receiver,
stereo, Home theatre. Display systems: CRT, LCD, LED and Graphics displays Video Players: DVD and
Blue RAY. Recording Systems: Digital Cameras and Camcorders.

UNIT III SMART HOME - SENSORS 9

Technology involved in Smart home, Home Virtual Assistants- Alexa and Google Home. Home Security
Systems - Intruder Detection, Automated blinds, Motion Sensors, Thermal Sensors and Image Sensors,
PIR, IR and Water Level Sensors.

UNIT IV HOME APPLIANCES 9

Home Enablement Systems: RFID Home, Lighting control, Automatic Cleaning Robots, Washing
Machines, Kitchen Electronics- Microwave, Dishwasher, Induction Stoves, Smart Refrigerators, Smart
alarms, Smart toilet, Smart floor, Smart locks.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO SMART OS AND COMMUNICATION 9

Introduction to Smart OS- Android and iOS. Video Conferencing Systems- Web/IP Camera, Video
security, Internet Enabled Systems, Wi-Fi, IoT, Li-Fi, GPS and Tracking Systems. Cordless Telephones,
Fax Machines, PDAs- Tablets, Smart Phones and Smart Watches.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Fundamental knowledge of electronic devices.

CO2: Fundamental knowledge of entertainment electronic systems.

259
 CO3: Gained knowledge on sensors and controls.

CO4: Operational knowledge on home applications.

CO5: Introductory knowledge on recent trends in communication systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Thomas L Floyd "Electronic Devices" 10th Edition Pearson Education Asia 2018.

2. Philp Hoff "Consumer Electronics for Engineers" - Cambridge University Press.1998.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jordan Frith, " Smartphones as Locative Media ", Wiley. 2014.

2. Dennis C Brewer, " Home Automation", Que Publishing 2013.

3. Thomas M. Coughlin, "Digital Storage in Consumer Electronics", Elsevier and Newness

2012.

4. Nick vandome, Smart homes in easy steps, - Master smart technology for your home 2018.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 1

260
EC23906 PRINCIPLES OF MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES :

• To introduce the relevance of this course to the existing technology with a futuristic visionalong
with socio-economic impact and issues
• To understand the design of a cellular system
• To study the characteristic of wireless channel
• To enable the student to understand the necessity for satellite based communication, the
essential elements involved and the transmission methodologies.
• To enable the student to understand the role of radar systems as navigational and landingaid.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 9

The evolution of electronic communication: From smoke signals to smart phones - History of
communications: Theoretical Foundations, Development & Applications - Frequencies for communication
- Frequency regulations - Overview of communication transmitter and receiver.

UNIT II CELLULAR COMMUNICATION 9

Mobile Cellular Communications: Evolution to cellular networks – Cellular systems generations and
standards: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G - Cellular network components - Components of a mobile phone –
setting up a call process - Making a call process - Receiving a call process - Spectrum allocation:
Policies and strategies, Role of TRAI.

UNIT III WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9

Wireless Communication: Introduction - Bluetooth - Infrared communication - IEEE Wireless LANs (Wi-
Fi) - IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX) - Future mobile and wireless networks: Introduction to 5G- device to device
communication- IoT.

UNIT IV SATILLITE COMMUNICATION 9

Satellite: History of Satellite communication, Basics of Satellites, Types of Satellites, Capacity Allocation
- Launch Vehicles and Orbits: Introduction to launching vehicles, Important Orbits, working of rocket,
Three Pioneers of Rocketry - Basics of Global Positioning System (GPS) - Applications of GPS.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO RADAR AND NAVIGATION 9

RADAR & NAVIGATION: Introduction, Radar Block diagram and Operation, Radar Frequencies,
Applications of Radar. Navigation Systems: Introduction & methods of navigation, Instrument Landing
System, Microwave landing system- Modern Navigation systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

261
COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Ability to comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the
presentcontemporary world.

CO2: The student would be capable of designing a cellular system based on resource
availability and traffic demands.

CO3: The student would be capable of characterizing a wireless channel and evolve the
systemdesign specifications.

CO4: The student would be able to demonstrate an understanding of the basic principles of
satellite orbits and the communication system components.

CO5: The student would be able to demonstrate an understanding of the basic principles of
radardesign and identify suitable navigation systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. S. Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4ed, John Wiley 2007

2. Rappaport Theodore S- “Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice”, 2ed, Pearson

Education India, 2010

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. [Link], “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3ed, Oxford University
Press,2007

2. Vijay. [Link], “ Wireless Communication and Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,

2007.

3. Myron Kyton and [Link] “ Avionics Navigtion Systems”, John Wiley & Sons 1997.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 2 2 2 1 1
CO4 2 3 2 1 1
CO5 2 2 2 1 1

262
EC23907 COMPUTER VISION AND MACHINE LEARNING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES :

• To provide the basic knowledge on computer vision.

• To understand simple image processing techniques, and algorithms.
• To give an exposure to selected machine learning models.
• To interrelate machine learning concepts and their application in computer vision problems.
• To impart knowledge on different learning algorithms.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER VISION 9

Point operators - Linear filtering – neighborhood operators - Feature detection and matching

UNIT II SEGMENTATION 9

Active contours - Split and merge - Mean shift and mode finding - Normalized cuts - Graph cuts
and energy-based methods

UNIT III MOTION ESTIMATION 9

Translational alignment - Parametric motion - Optical flow - Object detection - Face recognition-Instance
recognition -Category recognition - Context and scene understanding

UNIT IV MACHINE LEARNING MODELS 9

Types - Supervised and Unsupervised - Parametric and non-parametric models - discrete and
continuous distributions - Generative models for discrete data - Gaussian models

UNIT V LEARNING ALGORITHMS 9

Decision Trees - Multilayer Perceptrons - Kernel Machines - hidden Markov models - Deep learning -
Applications of deep networks

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will able to:
CO1: Comprehend and appreciate the ‘significance and role’ of this course in the present
contemporary world.

CO2: Explore the main challenges behind selected contemporary image processing and computer
vision problems.

CO3: Demonstrate the principles and applications of contemporary machine learning techniques.

CO4: Implement machine learning algorithms on image and video-related problems.

263
 CO5: Ability to design and develop systems using learning models and algorithms.

TEXT BOOKS:
1.
Richard Szeliski , ‘Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications’ Springer, 2011.
2. Kevin P. Murphy ‘Machine Learning - A Probabilistic Perspective’, The MIT Press
Cambridge, Massachusetts, London, England, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ethem Alpaydın , ‘Introduction to Machine Learning’ The MIT Press Cambridge,

Massachusetts London, England, II Edition , 2010
2. Simon J.D. Prince, “Computer Vision: Models, Learning, and Inference”,Cambridge
University Press 2012.
3. Forsyth and Ponce, ‘Computer Vision: A Modern Approach’ Pearson India, 2015.
4. Amin Ahmadi Tazehkandi, ‘Hands-On Algorithms For Computer Vision : Learn How To Use
The Best And Most Practical Computer Vision Algorithms’ Packt Publishing Limited, 2018.

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 2 2 1 1 1

264
EC23908 ROBOTICS AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES :

• To introduce basic robotic terminologies

• To illustrate kinematics and path planning
• To illustrate various parts of robots
• To impart knowledge on machine vision systems
• To apply robot based concepts for automation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTS 9

Introduction – Robotics -Definition and origin of robotics –components and structure of robots-
different types of robot – various generations of robots – degrees of freedom – Robot
classifications and specifications – Spatial descriptions and transformations

UNIT II KINEMATICS OF ROBOTS 9

Link Description - Link-Connection Description - Convention for Affixing Frames To Links -

Manipulator Kinematics- Actuator Space-Joint Space And Cartesian Space, Solvability, Algebraic
Vs. Geometric, Jacobians, Singularities, Static Forces In Manipulators- Case Studies: Kinematics
Of Two Industrial Robots, Inverse Manipulator Kinematics.

UNIT III SENSORS AND ACTUATION SYSTEMS OF ROBOTS 9

Position sensors – optical, non-optical, Velocity sensors, Accelerometers, Proximity Sensors

– Contact, non-contact, Range Sensing, touch and Slip Sensors, Force and Torque Sensors.
Robot Control through Vision sensors, Robot vision locating position, Robot guidance with vision
system, End effector camera Sensor. Actuators: Electric, Hydraulic and Pneumatic; Transmission:
Gears, Timing Belts and Bearings, Parameters for selection of actuators.

UNIT IV ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IN ROBOTICS 9

AI introduction, Intelligent Agent - Types of Agents, Agent environment, Problem solving- search
algorithms, Examples of Al - Healthcare, Education, Agriculture, Defense

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF ROBOTICS 9

Telepresence robot, Autonomous mobile robots, Walker Robots, Solar-ball Robot, Underwater
bots, Aerobots, Advanced robotics in Space - Specific features of space robotics systems - Next
generation robots.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course student will be able to

265
 CO1: Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world.

CO2: Understand kinematics of robotic systems

CO3: Integrate mechanical and electrical hardware for a real prototype of robotic device.

CO4: Develop system for industrial automation.

CO5: Provide automatic solution for replacing humans in life threatening area

TEXT BOOKS:

1. “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and control “ J. Craig , Pearson,2008

2. Fu K.S. Gonzaleaz R.C. and Lee C.S.G., "Robotics Control Sensing, Vision
and Intelligence",McGraw Hill, International Editions, 1987.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. “Robotics Engineering“, R. Klafter, PHI learning, 2009

2. John M. Holland, "Designing Autonomous Mobile Robots-Inside the mind of an Intelligent

Machine", Newnes Publication, 2004.

3. “Robot : Dynamics and Control”, Spong&Vidyasagar, McGraw Hill 2008.

4. Matthew T. Mason , “Mechanics of Robotic Manipulation (Intelligent Robotics and

Autonomous Agents)” , MIT press 2022.

5. Frank Chongwoo Park and Kevin Lynch, “Modern Robotics: Mechanics, Planning, and
Control” Cambridge university press, 2017

ARTICULATION MATRIX:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 1 2 2 1 1
CO5 1 3 2 1 1

266